Home | History | Annotate | Line # | Download | only in bfd
elf32-hppa.c revision 1.10
      1   1.1     skrll /* BFD back-end for HP PA-RISC ELF files.
      2  1.10  christos    Copyright (C) 1990-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
      3   1.1     skrll 
      4   1.1     skrll    Original code by
      5   1.1     skrll 	Center for Software Science
      6   1.1     skrll 	Department of Computer Science
      7   1.1     skrll 	University of Utah
      8   1.1     skrll    Largely rewritten by Alan Modra <alan (at) linuxcare.com.au>
      9   1.1     skrll    Naming cleanup by Carlos O'Donell <carlos (at) systemhalted.org>
     10   1.1     skrll    TLS support written by Randolph Chung <tausq (at) debian.org>
     11   1.7  christos 
     12   1.1     skrll    This file is part of BFD, the Binary File Descriptor library.
     13   1.1     skrll 
     14   1.1     skrll    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
     15   1.1     skrll    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
     16   1.1     skrll    the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
     17   1.1     skrll    (at your option) any later version.
     18   1.1     skrll 
     19   1.1     skrll    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
     20   1.1     skrll    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
     21   1.1     skrll    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
     22   1.1     skrll    GNU General Public License for more details.
     23   1.1     skrll 
     24   1.1     skrll    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
     25   1.1     skrll    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
     26   1.1     skrll    Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston,
     27   1.1     skrll    MA 02110-1301, USA.  */
     28   1.1     skrll 
     29   1.1     skrll #include "sysdep.h"
     30   1.1     skrll #include "bfd.h"
     31   1.1     skrll #include "libbfd.h"
     32   1.1     skrll #include "elf-bfd.h"
     33   1.1     skrll #include "elf/hppa.h"
     34   1.1     skrll #include "libhppa.h"
     35   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-hppa.h"
     36   1.1     skrll #define ARCH_SIZE		32
     37   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-hppa.h"
     38   1.1     skrll #include "elf-hppa.h"
     39   1.1     skrll 
     40   1.1     skrll /* In order to gain some understanding of code in this file without
     41   1.1     skrll    knowing all the intricate details of the linker, note the
     42   1.1     skrll    following:
     43   1.1     skrll 
     44   1.1     skrll    Functions named elf32_hppa_* are called by external routines, other
     45   1.1     skrll    functions are only called locally.  elf32_hppa_* functions appear
     46   1.1     skrll    in this file more or less in the order in which they are called
     47   1.1     skrll    from external routines.  eg. elf32_hppa_check_relocs is called
     48   1.1     skrll    early in the link process, elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections is
     49   1.1     skrll    one of the last functions.  */
     50   1.1     skrll 
     51   1.1     skrll /* We use two hash tables to hold information for linking PA ELF objects.
     52   1.1     skrll 
     53   1.1     skrll    The first is the elf32_hppa_link_hash_table which is derived
     54   1.1     skrll    from the standard ELF linker hash table.  We use this as a place to
     55   1.1     skrll    attach other hash tables and static information.
     56   1.1     skrll 
     57   1.1     skrll    The second is the stub hash table which is derived from the
     58   1.1     skrll    base BFD hash table.  The stub hash table holds the information
     59   1.1     skrll    necessary to build the linker stubs during a link.
     60   1.1     skrll 
     61   1.1     skrll    There are a number of different stubs generated by the linker.
     62   1.1     skrll 
     63   1.1     skrll    Long branch stub:
     64   1.1     skrll    :		ldil LR'X,%r1
     65   1.1     skrll    :		be,n RR'X(%sr4,%r1)
     66   1.1     skrll 
     67   1.1     skrll    PIC long branch stub:
     68   1.1     skrll    :		b,l .+8,%r1
     69   1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'X - ($PIC_pcrel$0 - 4),%r1
     70   1.1     skrll    :		be,n RR'X - ($PIC_pcrel$0 - 8)(%sr4,%r1)
     71   1.1     skrll 
     72   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from normal object file
     73   1.1     skrll    (single sub-space version)
     74   1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'lt_ptr+ltoff,%dp	; get procedure entry point
     75   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'lt_ptr+ltoff(%r1),%r21
     76   1.1     skrll    :		bv %r0(%r21)
     77   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'lt_ptr+ltoff+4(%r1),%r19	; get new dlt value.
     78   1.1     skrll 
     79   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from shared library
     80   1.1     skrll    (single sub-space version)
     81   1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'ltoff,%r19		; get procedure entry point
     82   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'ltoff(%r1),%r21
     83   1.1     skrll    :		bv %r0(%r21)
     84   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'ltoff+4(%r1),%r19	; get new dlt value.
     85   1.1     skrll 
     86   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from normal object file
     87   1.1     skrll    (multiple sub-space support)
     88   1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'lt_ptr+ltoff,%dp	; get procedure entry point
     89   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'lt_ptr+ltoff(%r1),%r21
     90   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'lt_ptr+ltoff+4(%r1),%r19	; get new dlt value.
     91   1.1     skrll    :		ldsid (%r21),%r1
     92   1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
     93   1.1     skrll    :		be 0(%sr0,%r21)			; branch to target
     94   1.1     skrll    :		stw %rp,-24(%sp)		; save rp
     95   1.1     skrll 
     96   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from shared library
     97   1.1     skrll    (multiple sub-space support)
     98   1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'ltoff,%r19		; get procedure entry point
     99   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'ltoff(%r1),%r21
    100   1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'ltoff+4(%r1),%r19	; get new dlt value.
    101   1.1     skrll    :		ldsid (%r21),%r1
    102   1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
    103   1.1     skrll    :		be 0(%sr0,%r21)			; branch to target
    104   1.1     skrll    :		stw %rp,-24(%sp)		; save rp
    105   1.1     skrll 
    106   1.1     skrll    Export stub to return from shared lib routine (multiple sub-space support)
    107   1.1     skrll    One of these is created for each exported procedure in a shared
    108   1.1     skrll    library (and stored in the shared lib).  Shared lib routines are
    109   1.1     skrll    called via the first instruction in the export stub so that we can
    110   1.1     skrll    do an inter-space return.  Not required for single sub-space.
    111   1.1     skrll    :		bl,n X,%rp			; trap the return
    112   1.1     skrll    :		nop
    113   1.1     skrll    :		ldw -24(%sp),%rp		; restore the original rp
    114   1.1     skrll    :		ldsid (%rp),%r1
    115   1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
    116   1.1     skrll    :		be,n 0(%sr0,%rp)		; inter-space return.  */
    117   1.1     skrll 
    118   1.1     skrll 
    119   1.1     skrll /* Variable names follow a coding style.
    120   1.1     skrll    Please follow this (Apps Hungarian) style:
    121   1.1     skrll 
    122   1.1     skrll    Structure/Variable         		Prefix
    123   1.1     skrll    elf_link_hash_table			"etab"
    124   1.1     skrll    elf_link_hash_entry			"eh"
    125   1.7  christos 
    126   1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_link_hash_table		"htab"
    127   1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry		"hh"
    128   1.1     skrll 
    129   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_table			"btab"
    130   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_entry			"bh"
    131   1.7  christos 
    132   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_table containing stubs	"bstab"
    133   1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry		"hsh"
    134   1.1     skrll 
    135   1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry		"hdh"
    136   1.7  christos 
    137   1.1     skrll    Always remember to use GNU Coding Style. */
    138   1.7  christos 
    139   1.1     skrll #define PLT_ENTRY_SIZE 8
    140   1.1     skrll #define GOT_ENTRY_SIZE 4
    141   1.1     skrll #define ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER "/lib/ld.so.1"
    142   1.1     skrll 
    143   1.1     skrll static const bfd_byte plt_stub[] =
    144   1.1     skrll {
    145   1.1     skrll   0x0e, 0x80, 0x10, 0x96,  /* 1: ldw	0(%r20),%r22		*/
    146   1.1     skrll   0xea, 0xc0, 0xc0, 0x00,  /*    bv	%r0(%r22)		*/
    147   1.1     skrll   0x0e, 0x88, 0x10, 0x95,  /*    ldw	4(%r20),%r21		*/
    148   1.1     skrll #define PLT_STUB_ENTRY (3*4)
    149   1.1     skrll   0xea, 0x9f, 0x1f, 0xdd,  /*    b,l	1b,%r20			*/
    150   1.1     skrll   0xd6, 0x80, 0x1c, 0x1e,  /*    depi	0,31,2,%r20		*/
    151   1.1     skrll   0x00, 0xc0, 0xff, 0xee,  /* 9: .word	fixup_func		*/
    152   1.1     skrll   0xde, 0xad, 0xbe, 0xef   /*    .word	fixup_ltp		*/
    153   1.1     skrll };
    154   1.1     skrll 
    155   1.1     skrll /* Section name for stubs is the associated section name plus this
    156   1.1     skrll    string.  */
    157   1.1     skrll #define STUB_SUFFIX ".stub"
    158   1.1     skrll 
    159   1.1     skrll /* We don't need to copy certain PC- or GP-relative dynamic relocs
    160   1.1     skrll    into a shared object's dynamic section.  All the relocs of the
    161   1.1     skrll    limited class we are interested in, are absolute.  */
    162   1.1     skrll #ifndef RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
    163   1.1     skrll #define RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS 0
    164   1.1     skrll #define IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC(r_type) 1
    165   1.1     skrll #endif
    166   1.1     skrll 
    167   1.1     skrll /* If ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS is non-zero, the linker will try to avoid
    168   1.1     skrll    copying dynamic variables from a shared lib into an app's dynbss
    169   1.1     skrll    section, and instead use a dynamic relocation to point into the
    170   1.1     skrll    shared lib.  */
    171   1.1     skrll #define ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS 1
    172   1.1     skrll 
    173   1.1     skrll enum elf32_hppa_stub_type
    174   1.1     skrll {
    175   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_long_branch,
    176   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_long_branch_shared,
    177   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_import,
    178   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_import_shared,
    179   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_export,
    180   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_none
    181   1.1     skrll };
    182   1.1     skrll 
    183   1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry
    184   1.1     skrll {
    185   1.1     skrll   /* Base hash table entry structure.  */
    186   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_entry bh_root;
    187   1.1     skrll 
    188   1.1     skrll   /* The stub section.  */
    189   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    190   1.1     skrll 
    191   1.1     skrll   /* Offset within stub_sec of the beginning of this stub.  */
    192   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma stub_offset;
    193   1.1     skrll 
    194   1.1     skrll   /* Given the symbol's value and its section we can determine its final
    195   1.1     skrll      value when building the stubs (so the stub knows where to jump.  */
    196   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma target_value;
    197   1.1     skrll   asection *target_section;
    198   1.1     skrll 
    199   1.1     skrll   enum elf32_hppa_stub_type stub_type;
    200   1.1     skrll 
    201   1.1     skrll   /* The symbol table entry, if any, that this was derived from.  */
    202   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
    203   1.1     skrll 
    204   1.1     skrll   /* Where this stub is being called from, or, in the case of combined
    205   1.1     skrll      stub sections, the first input section in the group.  */
    206   1.1     skrll   asection *id_sec;
    207   1.1     skrll };
    208   1.1     skrll 
    209   1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry
    210   1.1     skrll {
    211   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry eh;
    212   1.1     skrll 
    213   1.1     skrll   /* A pointer to the most recently used stub hash entry against this
    214   1.1     skrll      symbol.  */
    215   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh_cache;
    216   1.1     skrll 
    217   1.1     skrll   /* Used to count relocations for delayed sizing of relocation
    218   1.1     skrll      sections.  */
    219   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry
    220   1.1     skrll   {
    221   1.1     skrll     /* Next relocation in the chain.  */
    222   1.1     skrll     struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_next;
    223   1.1     skrll 
    224   1.1     skrll     /* The input section of the reloc.  */
    225   1.1     skrll     asection *sec;
    226   1.1     skrll 
    227   1.1     skrll     /* Number of relocs copied in this section.  */
    228   1.1     skrll     bfd_size_type count;
    229   1.1     skrll 
    230   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
    231   1.1     skrll   /* Number of relative relocs copied for the input section.  */
    232   1.1     skrll     bfd_size_type relative_count;
    233   1.1     skrll #endif
    234   1.1     skrll   } *dyn_relocs;
    235   1.1     skrll 
    236   1.1     skrll   enum
    237   1.1     skrll   {
    238   1.1     skrll     GOT_UNKNOWN = 0, GOT_NORMAL = 1, GOT_TLS_GD = 2, GOT_TLS_LDM = 4, GOT_TLS_IE = 8
    239   1.1     skrll   } tls_type;
    240   1.1     skrll 
    241   1.1     skrll   /* Set if this symbol is used by a plabel reloc.  */
    242   1.1     skrll   unsigned int plabel:1;
    243   1.1     skrll };
    244   1.1     skrll 
    245   1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table
    246   1.1     skrll {
    247   1.1     skrll   /* The main hash table.  */
    248   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table etab;
    249   1.1     skrll 
    250   1.1     skrll   /* The stub hash table.  */
    251   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_table bstab;
    252   1.1     skrll 
    253   1.1     skrll   /* Linker stub bfd.  */
    254   1.1     skrll   bfd *stub_bfd;
    255   1.1     skrll 
    256   1.1     skrll   /* Linker call-backs.  */
    257   1.1     skrll   asection * (*add_stub_section) (const char *, asection *);
    258   1.1     skrll   void (*layout_sections_again) (void);
    259   1.1     skrll 
    260   1.1     skrll   /* Array to keep track of which stub sections have been created, and
    261   1.1     skrll      information on stub grouping.  */
    262   1.1     skrll   struct map_stub
    263   1.1     skrll   {
    264   1.1     skrll     /* This is the section to which stubs in the group will be
    265   1.1     skrll        attached.  */
    266   1.1     skrll     asection *link_sec;
    267   1.1     skrll     /* The stub section.  */
    268   1.1     skrll     asection *stub_sec;
    269   1.1     skrll   } *stub_group;
    270   1.1     skrll 
    271   1.1     skrll   /* Assorted information used by elf32_hppa_size_stubs.  */
    272   1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_count;
    273   1.7  christos   unsigned int top_index;
    274   1.1     skrll   asection **input_list;
    275   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Sym **all_local_syms;
    276   1.1     skrll 
    277   1.1     skrll   /* Short-cuts to get to dynamic linker sections.  */
    278   1.1     skrll   asection *sgot;
    279   1.1     skrll   asection *srelgot;
    280   1.1     skrll   asection *splt;
    281   1.1     skrll   asection *srelplt;
    282   1.1     skrll   asection *sdynbss;
    283   1.1     skrll   asection *srelbss;
    284   1.1     skrll 
    285   1.1     skrll   /* Used during a final link to store the base of the text and data
    286   1.1     skrll      segments so that we can perform SEGREL relocations.  */
    287   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma text_segment_base;
    288   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma data_segment_base;
    289   1.1     skrll 
    290   1.1     skrll   /* Whether we support multiple sub-spaces for shared libs.  */
    291   1.1     skrll   unsigned int multi_subspace:1;
    292   1.1     skrll 
    293   1.1     skrll   /* Flags set when various size branches are detected.  Used to
    294   1.1     skrll      select suitable defaults for the stub group size.  */
    295   1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_12bit_branch:1;
    296   1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_17bit_branch:1;
    297   1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_22bit_branch:1;
    298   1.1     skrll 
    299   1.1     skrll   /* Set if we need a .plt stub to support lazy dynamic linking.  */
    300   1.1     skrll   unsigned int need_plt_stub:1;
    301   1.1     skrll 
    302   1.3  christos   /* Small local sym cache.  */
    303   1.3  christos   struct sym_cache sym_cache;
    304   1.1     skrll 
    305   1.1     skrll   /* Data for LDM relocations.  */
    306   1.1     skrll   union
    307   1.1     skrll   {
    308   1.1     skrll     bfd_signed_vma refcount;
    309   1.1     skrll     bfd_vma offset;
    310   1.1     skrll   } tls_ldm_got;
    311   1.1     skrll };
    312   1.1     skrll 
    313   1.1     skrll /* Various hash macros and functions.  */
    314   1.1     skrll #define hppa_link_hash_table(p) \
    315   1.3  christos   (elf_hash_table_id ((struct elf_link_hash_table *) ((p)->hash)) \
    316   1.3  christos   == HPPA32_ELF_DATA ? ((struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *) ((p)->hash)) : NULL)
    317   1.1     skrll 
    318   1.1     skrll #define hppa_elf_hash_entry(ent) \
    319   1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *)(ent))
    320   1.1     skrll 
    321   1.1     skrll #define hppa_stub_hash_entry(ent) \
    322   1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *)(ent))
    323   1.1     skrll 
    324   1.1     skrll #define hppa_stub_hash_lookup(table, string, create, copy) \
    325   1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *) \
    326   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_lookup ((table), (string), (create), (copy)))
    327   1.1     skrll 
    328   1.1     skrll #define hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type(abfd) \
    329   1.1     skrll   ((char *)(elf_local_got_offsets (abfd) + (elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr.sh_info * 2)))
    330   1.1     skrll 
    331   1.1     skrll #define hh_name(hh) \
    332   1.1     skrll   (hh ? hh->eh.root.root.string : "<undef>")
    333   1.1     skrll 
    334   1.1     skrll #define eh_name(eh) \
    335   1.1     skrll   (eh ? eh->root.root.string : "<undef>")
    336   1.1     skrll 
    337   1.1     skrll /* Assorted hash table functions.  */
    338   1.1     skrll 
    339   1.1     skrll /* Initialize an entry in the stub hash table.  */
    340   1.1     skrll 
    341   1.1     skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
    342   1.1     skrll stub_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
    343   1.1     skrll 		   struct bfd_hash_table *table,
    344   1.1     skrll 		   const char *string)
    345   1.1     skrll {
    346   1.1     skrll   /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
    347   1.1     skrll      subclass.  */
    348   1.1     skrll   if (entry == NULL)
    349   1.1     skrll     {
    350   1.1     skrll       entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
    351   1.1     skrll 				 sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry));
    352   1.1     skrll       if (entry == NULL)
    353   1.1     skrll 	return entry;
    354   1.1     skrll     }
    355   1.1     skrll 
    356   1.1     skrll   /* Call the allocation method of the superclass.  */
    357   1.1     skrll   entry = bfd_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
    358   1.1     skrll   if (entry != NULL)
    359   1.1     skrll     {
    360   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    361   1.1     skrll 
    362   1.1     skrll       /* Initialize the local fields.  */
    363   1.1     skrll       hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (entry);
    364   1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_sec = NULL;
    365   1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_offset = 0;
    366   1.1     skrll       hsh->target_value = 0;
    367   1.1     skrll       hsh->target_section = NULL;
    368   1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_long_branch;
    369   1.1     skrll       hsh->hh = NULL;
    370   1.1     skrll       hsh->id_sec = NULL;
    371   1.1     skrll     }
    372   1.1     skrll 
    373   1.1     skrll   return entry;
    374   1.1     skrll }
    375   1.1     skrll 
    376   1.1     skrll /* Initialize an entry in the link hash table.  */
    377   1.1     skrll 
    378   1.1     skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
    379   1.1     skrll hppa_link_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
    380   1.1     skrll 			struct bfd_hash_table *table,
    381   1.1     skrll 			const char *string)
    382   1.1     skrll {
    383   1.1     skrll   /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
    384   1.1     skrll      subclass.  */
    385   1.1     skrll   if (entry == NULL)
    386   1.1     skrll     {
    387   1.1     skrll       entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
    388   1.1     skrll 				 sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry));
    389   1.1     skrll       if (entry == NULL)
    390   1.1     skrll 	return entry;
    391   1.1     skrll     }
    392   1.1     skrll 
    393   1.1     skrll   /* Call the allocation method of the superclass.  */
    394   1.1     skrll   entry = _bfd_elf_link_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
    395   1.1     skrll   if (entry != NULL)
    396   1.1     skrll     {
    397   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
    398   1.1     skrll 
    399   1.1     skrll       /* Initialize the local fields.  */
    400   1.1     skrll       hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (entry);
    401   1.1     skrll       hh->hsh_cache = NULL;
    402   1.1     skrll       hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
    403   1.1     skrll       hh->plabel = 0;
    404   1.1     skrll       hh->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
    405   1.1     skrll     }
    406   1.1     skrll 
    407   1.1     skrll   return entry;
    408   1.1     skrll }
    409   1.1     skrll 
    410   1.7  christos /* Free the derived linker hash table.  */
    411   1.7  christos 
    412   1.7  christos static void
    413   1.7  christos elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_free (bfd *obfd)
    414   1.7  christos {
    415   1.7  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab
    416   1.7  christos     = (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *) obfd->link.hash;
    417   1.7  christos 
    418   1.7  christos   bfd_hash_table_free (&htab->bstab);
    419   1.7  christos   _bfd_elf_link_hash_table_free (obfd);
    420   1.7  christos }
    421   1.7  christos 
    422   1.1     skrll /* Create the derived linker hash table.  The PA ELF port uses the derived
    423   1.1     skrll    hash table to keep information specific to the PA ELF linker (without
    424   1.1     skrll    using static variables).  */
    425   1.1     skrll 
    426   1.1     skrll static struct bfd_link_hash_table *
    427   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_create (bfd *abfd)
    428   1.1     skrll {
    429   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    430   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt = sizeof (*htab);
    431   1.1     skrll 
    432   1.7  christos   htab = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
    433   1.1     skrll   if (htab == NULL)
    434   1.1     skrll     return NULL;
    435   1.1     skrll 
    436   1.1     skrll   if (!_bfd_elf_link_hash_table_init (&htab->etab, abfd, hppa_link_hash_newfunc,
    437   1.3  christos 				      sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry),
    438   1.3  christos 				      HPPA32_ELF_DATA))
    439   1.1     skrll     {
    440   1.1     skrll       free (htab);
    441   1.1     skrll       return NULL;
    442   1.1     skrll     }
    443   1.1     skrll 
    444   1.1     skrll   /* Init the stub hash table too.  */
    445   1.1     skrll   if (!bfd_hash_table_init (&htab->bstab, stub_hash_newfunc,
    446   1.1     skrll 			    sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry)))
    447   1.7  christos     {
    448   1.7  christos       _bfd_elf_link_hash_table_free (abfd);
    449   1.7  christos       return NULL;
    450   1.7  christos     }
    451   1.7  christos   htab->etab.root.hash_table_free = elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_free;
    452   1.1     skrll 
    453   1.1     skrll   htab->text_segment_base = (bfd_vma) -1;
    454   1.1     skrll   htab->data_segment_base = (bfd_vma) -1;
    455   1.1     skrll   return &htab->etab.root;
    456   1.1     skrll }
    457   1.1     skrll 
    458  1.10  christos /* Initialize the linker stubs BFD so that we can use it for linker
    459  1.10  christos    created dynamic sections.  */
    460  1.10  christos 
    461  1.10  christos void
    462  1.10  christos elf32_hppa_init_stub_bfd (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
    463  1.10  christos {
    464  1.10  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
    465  1.10  christos 
    466  1.10  christos   elf_elfheader (abfd)->e_ident[EI_CLASS] = ELFCLASS32;
    467  1.10  christos   htab->etab.dynobj = abfd;
    468  1.10  christos }
    469  1.10  christos 
    470   1.1     skrll /* Build a name for an entry in the stub hash table.  */
    471   1.1     skrll 
    472   1.1     skrll static char *
    473   1.1     skrll hppa_stub_name (const asection *input_section,
    474   1.1     skrll 		const asection *sym_sec,
    475   1.1     skrll 		const struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    476   1.1     skrll 		const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
    477   1.1     skrll {
    478   1.1     skrll   char *stub_name;
    479   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type len;
    480   1.1     skrll 
    481   1.1     skrll   if (hh)
    482   1.1     skrll     {
    483   1.1     skrll       len = 8 + 1 + strlen (hh_name (hh)) + 1 + 8 + 1;
    484   1.1     skrll       stub_name = bfd_malloc (len);
    485   1.1     skrll       if (stub_name != NULL)
    486   1.1     skrll 	sprintf (stub_name, "%08x_%s+%x",
    487   1.1     skrll 		 input_section->id & 0xffffffff,
    488   1.1     skrll 		 hh_name (hh),
    489   1.1     skrll 		 (int) rela->r_addend & 0xffffffff);
    490   1.1     skrll     }
    491   1.1     skrll   else
    492   1.1     skrll     {
    493   1.1     skrll       len = 8 + 1 + 8 + 1 + 8 + 1 + 8 + 1;
    494   1.1     skrll       stub_name = bfd_malloc (len);
    495   1.1     skrll       if (stub_name != NULL)
    496   1.1     skrll 	sprintf (stub_name, "%08x_%x:%x+%x",
    497   1.1     skrll 		 input_section->id & 0xffffffff,
    498   1.1     skrll 		 sym_sec->id & 0xffffffff,
    499   1.1     skrll 		 (int) ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) & 0xffffffff,
    500   1.1     skrll 		 (int) rela->r_addend & 0xffffffff);
    501   1.1     skrll     }
    502   1.1     skrll   return stub_name;
    503   1.1     skrll }
    504   1.1     skrll 
    505   1.1     skrll /* Look up an entry in the stub hash.  Stub entries are cached because
    506   1.1     skrll    creating the stub name takes a bit of time.  */
    507   1.1     skrll 
    508   1.1     skrll static struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *
    509   1.1     skrll hppa_get_stub_entry (const asection *input_section,
    510   1.1     skrll 		     const asection *sym_sec,
    511   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    512   1.1     skrll 		     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
    513   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab)
    514   1.1     skrll {
    515   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh_entry;
    516   1.1     skrll   const asection *id_sec;
    517   1.1     skrll 
    518   1.1     skrll   /* If this input section is part of a group of sections sharing one
    519   1.1     skrll      stub section, then use the id of the first section in the group.
    520   1.1     skrll      Stub names need to include a section id, as there may well be
    521   1.1     skrll      more than one stub used to reach say, printf, and we need to
    522   1.1     skrll      distinguish between them.  */
    523   1.1     skrll   id_sec = htab->stub_group[input_section->id].link_sec;
    524   1.1     skrll 
    525   1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL && hh->hsh_cache != NULL
    526   1.1     skrll       && hh->hsh_cache->hh == hh
    527   1.1     skrll       && hh->hsh_cache->id_sec == id_sec)
    528   1.1     skrll     {
    529   1.1     skrll       hsh_entry = hh->hsh_cache;
    530   1.1     skrll     }
    531   1.1     skrll   else
    532   1.1     skrll     {
    533   1.1     skrll       char *stub_name;
    534   1.1     skrll 
    535   1.1     skrll       stub_name = hppa_stub_name (id_sec, sym_sec, hh, rela);
    536   1.1     skrll       if (stub_name == NULL)
    537   1.1     skrll 	return NULL;
    538   1.1     skrll 
    539   1.1     skrll       hsh_entry = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
    540   1.1     skrll 					  stub_name, FALSE, FALSE);
    541   1.1     skrll       if (hh != NULL)
    542   1.1     skrll 	hh->hsh_cache = hsh_entry;
    543   1.1     skrll 
    544   1.1     skrll       free (stub_name);
    545   1.1     skrll     }
    546   1.1     skrll 
    547   1.1     skrll   return hsh_entry;
    548   1.1     skrll }
    549   1.1     skrll 
    550   1.1     skrll /* Add a new stub entry to the stub hash.  Not all fields of the new
    551   1.1     skrll    stub entry are initialised.  */
    552   1.1     skrll 
    553   1.1     skrll static struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *
    554   1.1     skrll hppa_add_stub (const char *stub_name,
    555   1.1     skrll 	       asection *section,
    556   1.1     skrll 	       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab)
    557   1.1     skrll {
    558   1.1     skrll   asection *link_sec;
    559   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    560   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    561   1.1     skrll 
    562   1.1     skrll   link_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].link_sec;
    563   1.1     skrll   stub_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].stub_sec;
    564   1.1     skrll   if (stub_sec == NULL)
    565   1.1     skrll     {
    566   1.1     skrll       stub_sec = htab->stub_group[link_sec->id].stub_sec;
    567   1.1     skrll       if (stub_sec == NULL)
    568   1.1     skrll 	{
    569   1.1     skrll 	  size_t namelen;
    570   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_size_type len;
    571   1.1     skrll 	  char *s_name;
    572   1.1     skrll 
    573   1.1     skrll 	  namelen = strlen (link_sec->name);
    574   1.1     skrll 	  len = namelen + sizeof (STUB_SUFFIX);
    575   1.1     skrll 	  s_name = bfd_alloc (htab->stub_bfd, len);
    576   1.1     skrll 	  if (s_name == NULL)
    577   1.1     skrll 	    return NULL;
    578   1.1     skrll 
    579   1.1     skrll 	  memcpy (s_name, link_sec->name, namelen);
    580   1.1     skrll 	  memcpy (s_name + namelen, STUB_SUFFIX, sizeof (STUB_SUFFIX));
    581   1.1     skrll 	  stub_sec = (*htab->add_stub_section) (s_name, link_sec);
    582   1.1     skrll 	  if (stub_sec == NULL)
    583   1.1     skrll 	    return NULL;
    584   1.1     skrll 	  htab->stub_group[link_sec->id].stub_sec = stub_sec;
    585   1.1     skrll 	}
    586   1.1     skrll       htab->stub_group[section->id].stub_sec = stub_sec;
    587   1.1     skrll     }
    588   1.1     skrll 
    589   1.1     skrll   /* Enter this entry into the linker stub hash table.  */
    590   1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab, stub_name,
    591   1.1     skrll 				      TRUE, FALSE);
    592   1.1     skrll   if (hsh == NULL)
    593   1.1     skrll     {
    594   1.1     skrll       (*_bfd_error_handler) (_("%B: cannot create stub entry %s"),
    595   1.1     skrll 			     section->owner,
    596   1.1     skrll 			     stub_name);
    597   1.1     skrll       return NULL;
    598   1.1     skrll     }
    599   1.1     skrll 
    600   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_sec = stub_sec;
    601   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_offset = 0;
    602   1.1     skrll   hsh->id_sec = link_sec;
    603   1.1     skrll   return hsh;
    604   1.1     skrll }
    605   1.1     skrll 
    606   1.1     skrll /* Determine the type of stub needed, if any, for a call.  */
    607   1.1     skrll 
    608   1.1     skrll static enum elf32_hppa_stub_type
    609   1.1     skrll hppa_type_of_stub (asection *input_sec,
    610   1.1     skrll 		   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
    611   1.1     skrll 		   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    612   1.1     skrll 		   bfd_vma destination,
    613   1.1     skrll 		   struct bfd_link_info *info)
    614   1.1     skrll {
    615   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma location;
    616   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma branch_offset;
    617   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma max_branch_offset;
    618   1.1     skrll   unsigned int r_type;
    619   1.1     skrll 
    620   1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL
    621   1.1     skrll       && hh->eh.plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
    622   1.1     skrll       && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
    623   1.1     skrll       && !hh->plabel
    624   1.7  christos       && (bfd_link_pic (info)
    625   1.1     skrll 	  || !hh->eh.def_regular
    626   1.1     skrll 	  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak))
    627   1.1     skrll     {
    628   1.1     skrll       /* We need an import stub.  Decide between hppa_stub_import
    629   1.1     skrll 	 and hppa_stub_import_shared later.  */
    630   1.1     skrll       return hppa_stub_import;
    631   1.1     skrll     }
    632   1.1     skrll 
    633   1.1     skrll   /* Determine where the call point is.  */
    634   1.1     skrll   location = (input_sec->output_offset
    635   1.1     skrll 	      + input_sec->output_section->vma
    636   1.1     skrll 	      + rela->r_offset);
    637   1.1     skrll 
    638   1.1     skrll   branch_offset = destination - location - 8;
    639   1.1     skrll   r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
    640   1.1     skrll 
    641   1.1     skrll   /* Determine if a long branch stub is needed.  parisc branch offsets
    642   1.1     skrll      are relative to the second instruction past the branch, ie. +8
    643   1.1     skrll      bytes on from the branch instruction location.  The offset is
    644   1.1     skrll      signed and counts in units of 4 bytes.  */
    645   1.1     skrll   if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F)
    646   1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (17 - 1)) << 2;
    647   1.1     skrll 
    648   1.1     skrll   else if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F)
    649   1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (12 - 1)) << 2;
    650   1.1     skrll 
    651   1.1     skrll   else /* R_PARISC_PCREL22F.  */
    652   1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (22 - 1)) << 2;
    653   1.1     skrll 
    654   1.1     skrll   if (branch_offset + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
    655   1.1     skrll     return hppa_stub_long_branch;
    656   1.1     skrll 
    657   1.1     skrll   return hppa_stub_none;
    658   1.1     skrll }
    659   1.1     skrll 
    660   1.1     skrll /* Build one linker stub as defined by the stub hash table entry GEN_ENTRY.
    661   1.1     skrll    IN_ARG contains the link info pointer.  */
    662   1.1     skrll 
    663   1.1     skrll #define LDIL_R1		0x20200000	/* ldil  LR'XXX,%r1		*/
    664   1.1     skrll #define BE_SR4_R1	0xe0202002	/* be,n  RR'XXX(%sr4,%r1)	*/
    665   1.1     skrll 
    666   1.1     skrll #define BL_R1		0xe8200000	/* b,l   .+8,%r1		*/
    667   1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_R1	0x28200000	/* addil LR'XXX,%r1,%r1		*/
    668   1.1     skrll #define DEPI_R1		0xd4201c1e	/* depi  0,31,2,%r1		*/
    669   1.1     skrll 
    670   1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_DP	0x2b600000	/* addil LR'XXX,%dp,%r1		*/
    671   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_R21	0x48350000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%r21	*/
    672   1.1     skrll #define BV_R0_R21	0xeaa0c000	/* bv    %r0(%r21)		*/
    673   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_R19	0x48330000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%r19	*/
    674   1.1     skrll 
    675   1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_R19	0x2a600000	/* addil LR'XXX,%r19,%r1	*/
    676   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DP	0x483b0000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%dp	*/
    677   1.1     skrll 
    678   1.1     skrll #define LDSID_R21_R1	0x02a010a1	/* ldsid (%sr0,%r21),%r1	*/
    679   1.1     skrll #define MTSP_R1		0x00011820	/* mtsp  %r1,%sr0		*/
    680   1.1     skrll #define BE_SR0_R21	0xe2a00000	/* be    0(%sr0,%r21)		*/
    681   1.1     skrll #define STW_RP		0x6bc23fd1	/* stw   %rp,-24(%sr0,%sp)	*/
    682   1.1     skrll 
    683   1.1     skrll #define BL22_RP		0xe800a002	/* b,l,n XXX,%rp		*/
    684   1.1     skrll #define BL_RP		0xe8400002	/* b,l,n XXX,%rp		*/
    685   1.1     skrll #define NOP		0x08000240	/* nop				*/
    686   1.1     skrll #define LDW_RP		0x4bc23fd1	/* ldw   -24(%sr0,%sp),%rp	*/
    687   1.1     skrll #define LDSID_RP_R1	0x004010a1	/* ldsid (%sr0,%rp),%r1		*/
    688   1.1     skrll #define BE_SR0_RP	0xe0400002	/* be,n  0(%sr0,%rp)		*/
    689   1.1     skrll 
    690   1.1     skrll #ifndef R19_STUBS
    691   1.1     skrll #define R19_STUBS 1
    692   1.1     skrll #endif
    693   1.1     skrll 
    694   1.1     skrll #if R19_STUBS
    695   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DLT	LDW_R1_R19
    696   1.1     skrll #else
    697   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DLT	LDW_R1_DP
    698   1.1     skrll #endif
    699   1.1     skrll 
    700   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    701   1.1     skrll hppa_build_one_stub (struct bfd_hash_entry *bh, void *in_arg)
    702   1.1     skrll {
    703   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    704   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
    705   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    706   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    707   1.1     skrll   bfd *stub_bfd;
    708   1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *loc;
    709   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma sym_value;
    710   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma insn;
    711   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma off;
    712   1.1     skrll   int val;
    713   1.1     skrll   int size;
    714   1.1     skrll 
    715   1.1     skrll   /* Massage our args to the form they really have.  */
    716   1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (bh);
    717   1.1     skrll   info = (struct bfd_link_info *)in_arg;
    718   1.1     skrll 
    719   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
    720   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
    721   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
    722   1.3  christos 
    723   1.1     skrll   stub_sec = hsh->stub_sec;
    724   1.1     skrll 
    725   1.1     skrll   /* Make a note of the offset within the stubs for this entry.  */
    726   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_offset = stub_sec->size;
    727   1.1     skrll   loc = stub_sec->contents + hsh->stub_offset;
    728   1.1     skrll 
    729   1.1     skrll   stub_bfd = stub_sec->owner;
    730   1.1     skrll 
    731   1.1     skrll   switch (hsh->stub_type)
    732   1.1     skrll     {
    733   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_long_branch:
    734   1.1     skrll       /* Create the long branch.  A long branch is formed with "ldil"
    735   1.1     skrll 	 loading the upper bits of the target address into a register,
    736   1.1     skrll 	 then branching with "be" which adds in the lower bits.
    737   1.1     skrll 	 The "be" has its delay slot nullified.  */
    738   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    739   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    740   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    741   1.1     skrll 
    742   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_lrsel);
    743   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDIL_R1, val, 21);
    744   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    745   1.1     skrll 
    746   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_rrsel) >> 2;
    747   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BE_SR4_R1, val, 17);
    748   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    749   1.1     skrll 
    750   1.1     skrll       size = 8;
    751   1.1     skrll       break;
    752   1.1     skrll 
    753   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_long_branch_shared:
    754   1.1     skrll       /* Branches are relative.  This is where we are going to.  */
    755   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    756   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    757   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    758   1.1     skrll 
    759   1.1     skrll       /* And this is where we are coming from, more or less.  */
    760   1.1     skrll       sym_value -= (hsh->stub_offset
    761   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_offset
    762   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_section->vma);
    763   1.1     skrll 
    764   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BL_R1, loc);
    765   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_lrsel);
    766   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) ADDIL_R1, val, 21);
    767   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    768   1.1     skrll 
    769   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_rrsel) >> 2;
    770   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BE_SR4_R1, val, 17);
    771   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 8);
    772   1.1     skrll       size = 12;
    773   1.1     skrll       break;
    774   1.1     skrll 
    775   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_import:
    776   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_import_shared:
    777   1.1     skrll       off = hsh->hh->eh.plt.offset;
    778   1.1     skrll       if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
    779   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
    780   1.1     skrll 
    781   1.1     skrll       off &= ~ (bfd_vma) 1;
    782   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (off
    783   1.1     skrll 		   + htab->splt->output_offset
    784   1.1     skrll 		   + htab->splt->output_section->vma
    785   1.1     skrll 		   - elf_gp (htab->splt->output_section->owner));
    786   1.1     skrll 
    787   1.1     skrll       insn = ADDIL_DP;
    788   1.1     skrll #if R19_STUBS
    789   1.1     skrll       if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_import_shared)
    790   1.1     skrll 	insn = ADDIL_R19;
    791   1.1     skrll #endif
    792   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_lrsel),
    793   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) insn, val, 21);
    794   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    795   1.1     skrll 
    796   1.1     skrll       /* It is critical to use lrsel/rrsel here because we are using
    797   1.1     skrll 	 two different offsets (+0 and +4) from sym_value.  If we use
    798   1.1     skrll 	 lsel/rsel then with unfortunate sym_values we will round
    799   1.1     skrll 	 sym_value+4 up to the next 2k block leading to a mis-match
    800   1.1     skrll 	 between the lsel and rsel value.  */
    801   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_rrsel);
    802   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDW_R1_R21, val, 14);
    803   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    804   1.1     skrll 
    805   1.1     skrll       if (htab->multi_subspace)
    806   1.1     skrll 	{
    807   1.1     skrll 	  val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) 4, e_rrsel);
    808   1.1     skrll 	  insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDW_R1_DLT, val, 14);
    809   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 8);
    810   1.1     skrll 
    811   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDSID_R21_R1, loc + 12);
    812   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) MTSP_R1,      loc + 16);
    813   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BE_SR0_R21,   loc + 20);
    814   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) STW_RP,       loc + 24);
    815   1.1     skrll 
    816   1.1     skrll 	  size = 28;
    817   1.1     skrll 	}
    818   1.1     skrll       else
    819   1.1     skrll 	{
    820   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BV_R0_R21, loc + 8);
    821   1.1     skrll 	  val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) 4, e_rrsel);
    822   1.1     skrll 	  insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDW_R1_DLT, val, 14);
    823   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 12);
    824   1.1     skrll 
    825   1.1     skrll 	  size = 16;
    826   1.1     skrll 	}
    827   1.1     skrll 
    828   1.1     skrll       break;
    829   1.1     skrll 
    830   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_export:
    831   1.1     skrll       /* Branches are relative.  This is where we are going to.  */
    832   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    833   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    834   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    835   1.1     skrll 
    836   1.1     skrll       /* And this is where we are coming from.  */
    837   1.1     skrll       sym_value -= (hsh->stub_offset
    838   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_offset
    839   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_section->vma);
    840   1.1     skrll 
    841   1.1     skrll       if (sym_value - 8 + (1 << (17 + 1)) >= (1 << (17 + 2))
    842   1.1     skrll 	  && (!htab->has_22bit_branch
    843   1.1     skrll 	      || sym_value - 8 + (1 << (22 + 1)) >= (1 << (22 + 2))))
    844   1.1     skrll 	{
    845   1.1     skrll 	  (*_bfd_error_handler)
    846   1.1     skrll 	    (_("%B(%A+0x%lx): cannot reach %s, recompile with -ffunction-sections"),
    847   1.1     skrll 	     hsh->target_section->owner,
    848   1.1     skrll 	     stub_sec,
    849   1.1     skrll 	     (long) hsh->stub_offset,
    850   1.1     skrll 	     hsh->bh_root.string);
    851   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
    852   1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
    853   1.1     skrll 	}
    854   1.1     skrll 
    855   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_fsel) >> 2;
    856   1.1     skrll       if (!htab->has_22bit_branch)
    857   1.1     skrll 	insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BL_RP, val, 17);
    858   1.1     skrll       else
    859   1.1     skrll 	insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BL22_RP, val, 22);
    860   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    861   1.1     skrll 
    862   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) NOP,         loc + 4);
    863   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDW_RP,      loc + 8);
    864   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDSID_RP_R1, loc + 12);
    865   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) MTSP_R1,     loc + 16);
    866   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BE_SR0_RP,   loc + 20);
    867   1.1     skrll 
    868   1.1     skrll       /* Point the function symbol at the stub.  */
    869   1.1     skrll       hsh->hh->eh.root.u.def.section = stub_sec;
    870   1.1     skrll       hsh->hh->eh.root.u.def.value = stub_sec->size;
    871   1.1     skrll 
    872   1.1     skrll       size = 24;
    873   1.1     skrll       break;
    874   1.1     skrll 
    875   1.1     skrll     default:
    876   1.1     skrll       BFD_FAIL ();
    877   1.1     skrll       return FALSE;
    878   1.1     skrll     }
    879   1.1     skrll 
    880   1.1     skrll   stub_sec->size += size;
    881   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    882   1.1     skrll }
    883   1.1     skrll 
    884   1.1     skrll #undef LDIL_R1
    885   1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR4_R1
    886   1.1     skrll #undef BL_R1
    887   1.1     skrll #undef ADDIL_R1
    888   1.1     skrll #undef DEPI_R1
    889   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_R21
    890   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_DLT
    891   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_R19
    892   1.1     skrll #undef ADDIL_R19
    893   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_DP
    894   1.1     skrll #undef LDSID_R21_R1
    895   1.1     skrll #undef MTSP_R1
    896   1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR0_R21
    897   1.1     skrll #undef STW_RP
    898   1.1     skrll #undef BV_R0_R21
    899   1.1     skrll #undef BL_RP
    900   1.1     skrll #undef NOP
    901   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_RP
    902   1.1     skrll #undef LDSID_RP_R1
    903   1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR0_RP
    904   1.1     skrll 
    905   1.1     skrll /* As above, but don't actually build the stub.  Just bump offset so
    906   1.1     skrll    we know stub section sizes.  */
    907   1.1     skrll 
    908   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    909   1.1     skrll hppa_size_one_stub (struct bfd_hash_entry *bh, void *in_arg)
    910   1.1     skrll {
    911   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    912   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    913   1.1     skrll   int size;
    914   1.1     skrll 
    915   1.1     skrll   /* Massage our args to the form they really have.  */
    916   1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (bh);
    917   1.1     skrll   htab = in_arg;
    918   1.1     skrll 
    919   1.1     skrll   if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch)
    920   1.1     skrll     size = 8;
    921   1.1     skrll   else if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch_shared)
    922   1.1     skrll     size = 12;
    923   1.1     skrll   else if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_export)
    924   1.1     skrll     size = 24;
    925   1.1     skrll   else /* hppa_stub_import or hppa_stub_import_shared.  */
    926   1.1     skrll     {
    927   1.1     skrll       if (htab->multi_subspace)
    928   1.1     skrll 	size = 28;
    929   1.1     skrll       else
    930   1.1     skrll 	size = 16;
    931   1.1     skrll     }
    932   1.1     skrll 
    933   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_sec->size += size;
    934   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    935   1.1     skrll }
    936   1.1     skrll 
    937   1.1     skrll /* Return nonzero if ABFD represents an HPPA ELF32 file.
    938   1.1     skrll    Additionally we set the default architecture and machine.  */
    939   1.1     skrll 
    940   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    941   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_object_p (bfd *abfd)
    942   1.1     skrll {
    943   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Ehdr * i_ehdrp;
    944   1.1     skrll   unsigned int flags;
    945   1.1     skrll 
    946   1.1     skrll   i_ehdrp = elf_elfheader (abfd);
    947   1.1     skrll   if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-linux") == 0)
    948   1.1     skrll     {
    949   1.6  christos       /* GCC on hppa-linux produces binaries with OSABI=GNU,
    950   1.1     skrll 	 but the kernel produces corefiles with OSABI=SysV.  */
    951   1.6  christos       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_GNU &&
    952   1.1     skrll 	  i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NONE) /* aka SYSV */
    953   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
    954   1.1     skrll     }
    955   1.1     skrll   else if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") == 0)
    956   1.1     skrll     {
    957   1.1     skrll       /* GCC on hppa-netbsd produces binaries with OSABI=NetBSD,
    958   1.1     skrll 	 but the kernel produces corefiles with OSABI=SysV.  */
    959   1.1     skrll       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NETBSD &&
    960   1.1     skrll 	  i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NONE) /* aka SYSV */
    961   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
    962   1.1     skrll     }
    963   1.1     skrll   else
    964   1.1     skrll     {
    965   1.1     skrll       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_HPUX)
    966   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
    967   1.1     skrll     }
    968   1.1     skrll 
    969   1.1     skrll   flags = i_ehdrp->e_flags;
    970   1.1     skrll   switch (flags & (EF_PARISC_ARCH | EF_PARISC_WIDE))
    971   1.1     skrll     {
    972   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_1_0:
    973   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 10);
    974   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_1_1:
    975   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 11);
    976   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_2_0:
    977   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 20);
    978   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_2_0 | EF_PARISC_WIDE:
    979   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 25);
    980   1.1     skrll     }
    981   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    982   1.1     skrll }
    983   1.1     skrll 
    984   1.1     skrll /* Create the .plt and .got sections, and set up our hash table
    985   1.1     skrll    short-cuts to various dynamic sections.  */
    986   1.1     skrll 
    987   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    988   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
    989   1.1     skrll {
    990   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    991   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh;
    992   1.1     skrll 
    993   1.1     skrll   /* Don't try to create the .plt and .got twice.  */
    994   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
    995   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
    996   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
    997   1.1     skrll   if (htab->splt != NULL)
    998   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
    999   1.1     skrll 
   1000   1.1     skrll   /* Call the generic code to do most of the work.  */
   1001   1.1     skrll   if (! _bfd_elf_create_dynamic_sections (abfd, info))
   1002   1.1     skrll     return FALSE;
   1003   1.1     skrll 
   1004   1.6  christos   htab->splt = bfd_get_linker_section (abfd, ".plt");
   1005   1.6  christos   htab->srelplt = bfd_get_linker_section (abfd, ".rela.plt");
   1006   1.1     skrll 
   1007   1.6  christos   htab->sgot = bfd_get_linker_section (abfd, ".got");
   1008   1.6  christos   htab->srelgot = bfd_get_linker_section (abfd, ".rela.got");
   1009   1.1     skrll 
   1010   1.6  christos   htab->sdynbss = bfd_get_linker_section (abfd, ".dynbss");
   1011   1.6  christos   htab->srelbss = bfd_get_linker_section (abfd, ".rela.bss");
   1012   1.1     skrll 
   1013   1.1     skrll   /* hppa-linux needs _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ to be visible from the main
   1014   1.1     skrll      application, because __canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare needs it.  */
   1015   1.1     skrll   eh = elf_hash_table (info)->hgot;
   1016   1.1     skrll   eh->forced_local = 0;
   1017   1.1     skrll   eh->other = STV_DEFAULT;
   1018   1.1     skrll   return bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh);
   1019   1.1     skrll }
   1020   1.1     skrll 
   1021   1.1     skrll /* Copy the extra info we tack onto an elf_link_hash_entry.  */
   1022   1.1     skrll 
   1023   1.1     skrll static void
   1024   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_copy_indirect_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1025   1.1     skrll 				 struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh_dir,
   1026   1.1     skrll 				 struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh_ind)
   1027   1.1     skrll {
   1028   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh_dir, *hh_ind;
   1029   1.1     skrll 
   1030   1.1     skrll   hh_dir = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_dir);
   1031   1.1     skrll   hh_ind = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_ind);
   1032   1.1     skrll 
   1033   1.1     skrll   if (hh_ind->dyn_relocs != NULL)
   1034   1.1     skrll     {
   1035   1.1     skrll       if (hh_dir->dyn_relocs != NULL)
   1036   1.1     skrll 	{
   1037   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry **hdh_pp;
   1038   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   1039   1.1     skrll 
   1040   1.1     skrll 	  /* Add reloc counts against the indirect sym to the direct sym
   1041   1.1     skrll 	     list.  Merge any entries against the same section.  */
   1042   1.1     skrll 	  for (hdh_pp = &hh_ind->dyn_relocs; (hdh_p = *hdh_pp) != NULL; )
   1043   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1044   1.1     skrll 	      struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_q;
   1045   1.1     skrll 
   1046   1.1     skrll 	      for (hdh_q = hh_dir->dyn_relocs;
   1047   1.1     skrll 		   hdh_q != NULL;
   1048   1.1     skrll 		   hdh_q = hdh_q->hdh_next)
   1049   1.1     skrll 		if (hdh_q->sec == hdh_p->sec)
   1050   1.1     skrll 		  {
   1051   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1052   1.1     skrll 		    hdh_q->relative_count += hdh_p->relative_count;
   1053   1.1     skrll #endif
   1054   1.1     skrll 		    hdh_q->count += hdh_p->count;
   1055   1.1     skrll 		    *hdh_pp = hdh_p->hdh_next;
   1056   1.1     skrll 		    break;
   1057   1.1     skrll 		  }
   1058   1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_q == NULL)
   1059   1.1     skrll 		hdh_pp = &hdh_p->hdh_next;
   1060   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1061   1.1     skrll 	  *hdh_pp = hh_dir->dyn_relocs;
   1062   1.1     skrll 	}
   1063   1.1     skrll 
   1064   1.1     skrll       hh_dir->dyn_relocs = hh_ind->dyn_relocs;
   1065   1.1     skrll       hh_ind->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1066   1.1     skrll     }
   1067   1.1     skrll 
   1068   1.1     skrll   if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   1069   1.1     skrll       && eh_ind->root.type != bfd_link_hash_indirect
   1070   1.1     skrll       && eh_dir->dynamic_adjusted)
   1071   1.1     skrll     {
   1072   1.1     skrll       /* If called to transfer flags for a weakdef during processing
   1073   1.1     skrll 	 of elf_adjust_dynamic_symbol, don't copy non_got_ref.
   1074   1.1     skrll 	 We clear it ourselves for ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS.  */
   1075   1.1     skrll       eh_dir->ref_dynamic |= eh_ind->ref_dynamic;
   1076   1.1     skrll       eh_dir->ref_regular |= eh_ind->ref_regular;
   1077   1.1     skrll       eh_dir->ref_regular_nonweak |= eh_ind->ref_regular_nonweak;
   1078   1.1     skrll       eh_dir->needs_plt |= eh_ind->needs_plt;
   1079   1.1     skrll     }
   1080   1.1     skrll   else
   1081   1.1     skrll     {
   1082   1.1     skrll       if (eh_ind->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   1083   1.1     skrll           && eh_dir->got.refcount <= 0)
   1084   1.1     skrll         {
   1085   1.1     skrll           hh_dir->tls_type = hh_ind->tls_type;
   1086   1.1     skrll           hh_ind->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
   1087   1.1     skrll         }
   1088   1.1     skrll 
   1089   1.1     skrll       _bfd_elf_link_hash_copy_indirect (info, eh_dir, eh_ind);
   1090   1.1     skrll     }
   1091   1.1     skrll }
   1092   1.1     skrll 
   1093   1.1     skrll static int
   1094   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_optimized_tls_reloc (struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   1095   1.1     skrll 				int r_type, int is_local ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
   1096   1.1     skrll {
   1097   1.1     skrll   /* For now we don't support linker optimizations.  */
   1098   1.1     skrll   return r_type;
   1099   1.1     skrll }
   1100   1.1     skrll 
   1101   1.3  christos /* Return a pointer to the local GOT, PLT and TLS reference counts
   1102   1.3  christos    for ABFD.  Returns NULL if the storage allocation fails.  */
   1103   1.3  christos 
   1104   1.3  christos static bfd_signed_vma *
   1105   1.3  christos hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (bfd *abfd)
   1106   1.3  christos {
   1107   1.3  christos   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr;
   1108   1.3  christos   bfd_signed_vma *local_refcounts;
   1109   1.7  christos 
   1110   1.3  christos   local_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
   1111   1.3  christos   if (local_refcounts == NULL)
   1112   1.3  christos     {
   1113   1.3  christos       bfd_size_type size;
   1114   1.3  christos 
   1115   1.3  christos       /* Allocate space for local GOT and PLT reference
   1116   1.3  christos 	 counts.  Done this way to save polluting elf_obj_tdata
   1117   1.3  christos 	 with another target specific pointer.  */
   1118   1.3  christos       size = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1119   1.3  christos       size *= 2 * sizeof (bfd_signed_vma);
   1120   1.3  christos       /* Add in space to store the local GOT TLS types.  */
   1121   1.3  christos       size += symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1122   1.3  christos       local_refcounts = bfd_zalloc (abfd, size);
   1123   1.3  christos       if (local_refcounts == NULL)
   1124   1.3  christos 	return NULL;
   1125   1.3  christos       elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd) = local_refcounts;
   1126   1.3  christos       memset (hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (abfd), GOT_UNKNOWN,
   1127   1.3  christos 	      symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   1128   1.3  christos     }
   1129   1.3  christos   return local_refcounts;
   1130   1.3  christos }
   1131   1.3  christos 
   1132   1.3  christos 
   1133   1.1     skrll /* Look through the relocs for a section during the first phase, and
   1134   1.1     skrll    calculate needed space in the global offset table, procedure linkage
   1135   1.1     skrll    table, and dynamic reloc sections.  At this point we haven't
   1136   1.1     skrll    necessarily read all the input files.  */
   1137   1.1     skrll 
   1138   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1139   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_check_relocs (bfd *abfd,
   1140   1.1     skrll 			 struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1141   1.1     skrll 			 asection *sec,
   1142   1.1     skrll 			 const Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs)
   1143   1.1     skrll {
   1144   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   1145   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_syms;
   1146   1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela;
   1147   1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela_end;
   1148   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1149   1.1     skrll   asection *sreloc;
   1150   1.1     skrll   int tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN, old_tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
   1151   1.1     skrll 
   1152   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   1153   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1154   1.1     skrll 
   1155   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1156   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1157   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1158   1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr;
   1159   1.1     skrll   eh_syms = elf_sym_hashes (abfd);
   1160   1.1     skrll   sreloc = NULL;
   1161   1.1     skrll 
   1162   1.1     skrll   rela_end = relocs + sec->reloc_count;
   1163   1.1     skrll   for (rela = relocs; rela < rela_end; rela++)
   1164   1.1     skrll     {
   1165   1.1     skrll       enum {
   1166   1.1     skrll 	NEED_GOT = 1,
   1167   1.1     skrll 	NEED_PLT = 2,
   1168   1.1     skrll 	NEED_DYNREL = 4,
   1169   1.1     skrll 	PLT_PLABEL = 8
   1170   1.1     skrll       };
   1171   1.1     skrll 
   1172   1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_symndx, r_type;
   1173   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1174   1.1     skrll       int need_entry = 0;
   1175   1.1     skrll 
   1176   1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   1177   1.1     skrll 
   1178   1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   1179   1.1     skrll 	hh = NULL;
   1180   1.1     skrll       else
   1181   1.1     skrll 	{
   1182   1.1     skrll 	  hh =  hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_syms[r_symndx - symtab_hdr->sh_info]);
   1183   1.1     skrll 	  while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   1184   1.1     skrll 		 || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   1185   1.1     skrll 	    hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   1186   1.7  christos 
   1187   1.7  christos 	  /* PR15323, ref flags aren't set for references in the same
   1188   1.7  christos 	     object.  */
   1189   1.7  christos 	  hh->eh.root.non_ir_ref = 1;
   1190   1.1     skrll 	}
   1191   1.1     skrll 
   1192   1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   1193   1.1     skrll       r_type = elf32_hppa_optimized_tls_reloc (info, r_type, hh == NULL);
   1194   1.1     skrll 
   1195   1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   1196   1.1     skrll 	{
   1197   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   1198   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   1199   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   1200   1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires a global offset table entry.  */
   1201   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1202   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1203   1.1     skrll 
   1204   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R: /* "Official" procedure labels.  */
   1205   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   1206   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   1207   1.1     skrll 	  /* If the addend is non-zero, we break badly.  */
   1208   1.1     skrll 	  if (rela->r_addend != 0)
   1209   1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   1210   1.1     skrll 
   1211   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library, then we need to
   1212   1.1     skrll 	     create a PLT entry for all PLABELs, because PLABELs with
   1213   1.1     skrll 	     local symbols may be passed via a pointer to another
   1214   1.1     skrll 	     object.  Additionally, output a dynamic relocation
   1215   1.1     skrll 	     pointing to the PLT entry.
   1216   1.1     skrll 
   1217   1.1     skrll 	     For executables, the original 32-bit ABI allowed two
   1218   1.1     skrll 	     different styles of PLABELs (function pointers):  For
   1219   1.1     skrll 	     global functions, the PLABEL word points into the .plt
   1220   1.1     skrll 	     two bytes past a (function address, gp) pair, and for
   1221   1.1     skrll 	     local functions the PLABEL points directly at the
   1222   1.1     skrll 	     function.  The magic +2 for the first type allows us to
   1223   1.1     skrll 	     differentiate between the two.  As you can imagine, this
   1224   1.1     skrll 	     is a real pain when it comes to generating code to call
   1225   1.1     skrll 	     functions indirectly or to compare function pointers.
   1226   1.1     skrll 	     We avoid the mess by always pointing a PLABEL into the
   1227   1.1     skrll 	     .plt, even for local functions.  */
   1228   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = PLT_PLABEL | NEED_PLT | NEED_DYNREL;
   1229   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1230   1.1     skrll 
   1231   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   1232   1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_12bit_branch = 1;
   1233   1.1     skrll 	  goto branch_common;
   1234   1.1     skrll 
   1235   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   1236   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   1237   1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_17bit_branch = 1;
   1238   1.1     skrll 	  goto branch_common;
   1239   1.1     skrll 
   1240   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   1241   1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_22bit_branch = 1;
   1242   1.1     skrll 	branch_common:
   1243   1.1     skrll 	  /* Function calls might need to go through the .plt, and
   1244   1.1     skrll 	     might require long branch stubs.  */
   1245   1.1     skrll 	  if (hh == NULL)
   1246   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1247   1.1     skrll 	      /* We know local syms won't need a .plt entry, and if
   1248   1.1     skrll 		 they need a long branch stub we can't guarantee that
   1249   1.1     skrll 		 we can reach the stub.  So just flag an error later
   1250   1.1     skrll 		 if we're doing a shared link and find we need a long
   1251   1.1     skrll 		 branch stub.  */
   1252   1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   1253   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1254   1.1     skrll 	  else
   1255   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1256   1.1     skrll 	      /* Global symbols will need a .plt entry if they remain
   1257   1.1     skrll 		 global, and in most cases won't need a long branch
   1258   1.1     skrll 		 stub.  Unfortunately, we have to cater for the case
   1259   1.1     skrll 		 where a symbol is forced local by versioning, or due
   1260   1.1     skrll 		 to symbolic linking, and we lose the .plt entry.  */
   1261   1.1     skrll 	      need_entry = NEED_PLT;
   1262   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh->eh.type == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   1263   1.1     skrll 		need_entry = 0;
   1264   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1265   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1266   1.1     skrll 
   1267   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGBASE:  /* Used to set segment base.  */
   1268   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGREL32: /* Relative reloc, used for unwind.  */
   1269   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL14F: /* PC relative load/store.  */
   1270   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   1271   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17R: /* External branches.  */
   1272   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL21L: /* As above, and for load/store too.  */
   1273   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   1274   1.1     skrll 	  /* We don't need to propagate the relocation if linking a
   1275   1.1     skrll 	     shared object since these are section relative.  */
   1276   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1277   1.1     skrll 
   1278   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14F: /* Used for gp rel data load/store.  */
   1279   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   1280   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   1281   1.7  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1282   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1283   1.1     skrll 	      (*_bfd_error_handler)
   1284   1.1     skrll 		(_("%B: relocation %s can not be used when making a shared object; recompile with -fPIC"),
   1285   1.1     skrll 		 abfd,
   1286   1.1     skrll 		 elf_hppa_howto_table[r_type].name);
   1287   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   1288   1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   1289   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1290   1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
   1291   1.1     skrll 
   1292   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17F: /* Used for external branches.  */
   1293   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   1294   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14F: /* Used for load/store from absolute locn.  */
   1295   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   1296   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR21L: /* As above, and for ext branches too.  */
   1297   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR32: /* .word relocs.  */
   1298   1.1     skrll 	  /* We may want to output a dynamic relocation later.  */
   1299   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_DYNREL;
   1300   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1301   1.1     skrll 
   1302   1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes the C++ object vtable hierarchy.
   1303   1.1     skrll 	     Reconstruct it for later use during GC.  */
   1304   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1305   1.1     skrll 	  if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtinherit (abfd, sec, &hh->eh, rela->r_offset))
   1306   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1307   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1308   1.1     skrll 
   1309   1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes which C++ vtable entries are actually
   1310   1.1     skrll 	     used.  Record for later use during GC.  */
   1311   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1312   1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT (hh != NULL);
   1313   1.1     skrll 	  if (hh != NULL
   1314   1.1     skrll 	      && !bfd_elf_gc_record_vtentry (abfd, sec, &hh->eh, rela->r_addend))
   1315   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1316   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1317   1.1     skrll 
   1318   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   1319   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   1320   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   1321   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   1322   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1323   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1324   1.1     skrll 
   1325   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   1326   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   1327   1.7  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1328   1.1     skrll             info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS;
   1329   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1330   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1331   1.1     skrll 
   1332   1.1     skrll 	default:
   1333   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1334   1.1     skrll 	}
   1335   1.1     skrll 
   1336   1.1     skrll       /* Now carry out our orders.  */
   1337   1.1     skrll       if (need_entry & NEED_GOT)
   1338   1.1     skrll 	{
   1339   1.1     skrll 	  switch (r_type)
   1340   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1341   1.1     skrll 	    default:
   1342   1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_NORMAL;
   1343   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1344   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   1345   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   1346   1.1     skrll 	      tls_type |= GOT_TLS_GD;
   1347   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1348   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   1349   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   1350   1.1     skrll 	      tls_type |= GOT_TLS_LDM;
   1351   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1352   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   1353   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   1354   1.1     skrll 	      tls_type |= GOT_TLS_IE;
   1355   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1356   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1357   1.1     skrll 
   1358   1.1     skrll 	  /* Allocate space for a GOT entry, as well as a dynamic
   1359   1.1     skrll 	     relocation for this entry.  */
   1360   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->sgot == NULL)
   1361   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1362   1.1     skrll 	      if (!elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections (htab->etab.dynobj, info))
   1363   1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   1364   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1365   1.1     skrll 
   1366   1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L
   1367   1.1     skrll 	      || r_type == R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R)
   1368   1.3  christos 	    htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount += 1;
   1369   1.1     skrll 	  else
   1370   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1371   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   1372   1.1     skrll 	        {
   1373   1.1     skrll 	          hh->eh.got.refcount += 1;
   1374   1.1     skrll 	          old_tls_type = hh->tls_type;
   1375   1.1     skrll 	        }
   1376   1.1     skrll 	      else
   1377   1.1     skrll 	        {
   1378   1.1     skrll 	          bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
   1379   1.7  christos 
   1380   1.1     skrll 	          /* This is a global offset table entry for a local symbol.  */
   1381   1.3  christos 	          local_got_refcounts = hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (abfd);
   1382   1.1     skrll 	          if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
   1383   1.3  christos 		    return FALSE;
   1384   1.1     skrll 	          local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1385   1.1     skrll 
   1386   1.1     skrll 	          old_tls_type = hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx];
   1387   1.1     skrll 	        }
   1388   1.1     skrll 
   1389   1.1     skrll 	      tls_type |= old_tls_type;
   1390   1.1     skrll 
   1391   1.1     skrll 	      if (old_tls_type != tls_type)
   1392   1.1     skrll 	        {
   1393   1.1     skrll 	          if (hh != NULL)
   1394   1.1     skrll 		    hh->tls_type = tls_type;
   1395   1.1     skrll 	          else
   1396   1.1     skrll 		    hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx] = tls_type;
   1397   1.1     skrll 	        }
   1398   1.1     skrll 
   1399   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1400   1.1     skrll 	}
   1401   1.1     skrll 
   1402   1.1     skrll       if (need_entry & NEED_PLT)
   1403   1.1     skrll 	{
   1404   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library, and this is a reloc
   1405   1.1     skrll 	     against a weak symbol or a global symbol in a dynamic
   1406   1.1     skrll 	     object, then we will be creating an import stub and a
   1407   1.1     skrll 	     .plt entry for the symbol.  Similarly, on a normal link
   1408   1.1     skrll 	     to symbols defined in a dynamic object we'll need the
   1409   1.1     skrll 	     import stub and a .plt entry.  We don't know yet whether
   1410   1.1     skrll 	     the symbol is defined or not, so make an entry anyway and
   1411   1.1     skrll 	     clean up later in adjust_dynamic_symbol.  */
   1412   1.1     skrll 	  if ((sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
   1413   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1414   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   1415   1.1     skrll 		{
   1416   1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.needs_plt = 1;
   1417   1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.plt.refcount += 1;
   1418   1.1     skrll 
   1419   1.1     skrll 		  /* If this .plt entry is for a plabel, mark it so
   1420   1.1     skrll 		     that adjust_dynamic_symbol will keep the entry
   1421   1.1     skrll 		     even if it appears to be local.  */
   1422   1.1     skrll 		  if (need_entry & PLT_PLABEL)
   1423   1.1     skrll 		    hh->plabel = 1;
   1424   1.1     skrll 		}
   1425   1.1     skrll 	      else if (need_entry & PLT_PLABEL)
   1426   1.1     skrll 		{
   1427   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
   1428   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_signed_vma *local_plt_refcounts;
   1429   1.1     skrll 
   1430   1.3  christos 		  local_got_refcounts = hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (abfd);
   1431   1.1     skrll 		  if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
   1432   1.3  christos 		    return FALSE;
   1433   1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_refcounts = (local_got_refcounts
   1434   1.1     skrll 					 + symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   1435   1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1436   1.1     skrll 		}
   1437   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1438   1.1     skrll 	}
   1439   1.1     skrll 
   1440   1.1     skrll       if (need_entry & NEED_DYNREL)
   1441   1.1     skrll 	{
   1442   1.1     skrll 	  /* Flag this symbol as having a non-got, non-plt reference
   1443   1.1     skrll 	     so that we generate copy relocs if it turns out to be
   1444   1.1     skrll 	     dynamic.  */
   1445   1.7  christos 	  if (hh != NULL && !bfd_link_pic (info))
   1446   1.1     skrll 	    hh->eh.non_got_ref = 1;
   1447   1.1     skrll 
   1448   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library then we need to copy
   1449   1.1     skrll 	     the reloc into the shared library.  However, if we are
   1450   1.1     skrll 	     linking with -Bsymbolic, we need only copy absolute
   1451   1.1     skrll 	     relocs or relocs against symbols that are not defined in
   1452   1.1     skrll 	     an object we are including in the link.  PC- or DP- or
   1453   1.1     skrll 	     DLT-relative relocs against any local sym or global sym
   1454   1.1     skrll 	     with DEF_REGULAR set, can be discarded.  At this point we
   1455   1.1     skrll 	     have not seen all the input files, so it is possible that
   1456   1.1     skrll 	     DEF_REGULAR is not set now but will be set later (it is
   1457   1.1     skrll 	     never cleared).  We account for that possibility below by
   1458   1.1     skrll 	     storing information in the dyn_relocs field of the
   1459   1.1     skrll 	     hash table entry.
   1460   1.1     skrll 
   1461   1.1     skrll 	     A similar situation to the -Bsymbolic case occurs when
   1462   1.1     skrll 	     creating shared libraries and symbol visibility changes
   1463   1.1     skrll 	     render the symbol local.
   1464   1.1     skrll 
   1465   1.1     skrll 	     As it turns out, all the relocs we will be creating here
   1466   1.1     skrll 	     are absolute, so we cannot remove them on -Bsymbolic
   1467   1.1     skrll 	     links or visibility changes anyway.  A STUB_REL reloc
   1468   1.1     skrll 	     is absolute too, as in that case it is the reloc in the
   1469   1.1     skrll 	     stub we will be creating, rather than copying the PCREL
   1470   1.1     skrll 	     reloc in the branch.
   1471   1.1     skrll 
   1472   1.1     skrll 	     If on the other hand, we are creating an executable, we
   1473   1.1     skrll 	     may need to keep relocations for symbols satisfied by a
   1474   1.1     skrll 	     dynamic library if we manage to avoid copy relocs for the
   1475   1.1     skrll 	     symbol.  */
   1476   1.7  christos 	  if ((bfd_link_pic (info)
   1477   1.1     skrll 	       && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0
   1478   1.1     skrll 	       && (IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)
   1479   1.1     skrll 		   || (hh != NULL
   1480   1.7  christos 		       && (!SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, &hh->eh)
   1481   1.1     skrll 			   || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1482   1.1     skrll 			   || !hh->eh.def_regular))))
   1483   1.1     skrll 	      || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   1484   1.7  christos 		  && !bfd_link_pic (info)
   1485   1.1     skrll 		  && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0
   1486   1.1     skrll 		  && hh != NULL
   1487   1.1     skrll 		  && (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1488   1.1     skrll 		      || !hh->eh.def_regular)))
   1489   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1490   1.1     skrll 	      struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   1491   1.1     skrll 	      struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry **hdh_head;
   1492   1.1     skrll 
   1493   1.1     skrll 	      /* Create a reloc section in dynobj and make room for
   1494   1.1     skrll 		 this reloc.  */
   1495   1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   1496   1.1     skrll 		{
   1497   1.3  christos 		  sreloc = _bfd_elf_make_dynamic_reloc_section
   1498   1.3  christos 		    (sec, htab->etab.dynobj, 2, abfd, /*rela?*/ TRUE);
   1499   1.3  christos 
   1500   1.1     skrll 		  if (sreloc == NULL)
   1501   1.1     skrll 		    {
   1502   1.3  christos 		      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   1503   1.3  christos 		      return FALSE;
   1504   1.1     skrll 		    }
   1505   1.1     skrll 		}
   1506   1.1     skrll 
   1507   1.1     skrll 	      /* If this is a global symbol, we count the number of
   1508   1.1     skrll 		 relocations we need for this symbol.  */
   1509   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   1510   1.1     skrll 		{
   1511   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_head = &hh->dyn_relocs;
   1512   1.1     skrll 		}
   1513   1.1     skrll 	      else
   1514   1.1     skrll 		{
   1515   1.1     skrll 		  /* Track dynamic relocs needed for local syms too.
   1516   1.1     skrll 		     We really need local syms available to do this
   1517   1.1     skrll 		     easily.  Oh well.  */
   1518   1.1     skrll 		  asection *sr;
   1519   1.1     skrll 		  void *vpp;
   1520   1.3  christos 		  Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
   1521   1.3  christos 
   1522   1.3  christos 		  isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->sym_cache,
   1523   1.3  christos 						abfd, r_symndx);
   1524   1.3  christos 		  if (isym == NULL)
   1525   1.3  christos 		    return FALSE;
   1526   1.1     skrll 
   1527   1.3  christos 		  sr = bfd_section_from_elf_index (abfd, isym->st_shndx);
   1528   1.1     skrll 		  if (sr == NULL)
   1529   1.3  christos 		    sr = sec;
   1530   1.1     skrll 
   1531   1.1     skrll 		  vpp = &elf_section_data (sr)->local_dynrel;
   1532   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_head = (struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry **) vpp;
   1533   1.1     skrll 		}
   1534   1.1     skrll 
   1535   1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p = *hdh_head;
   1536   1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_p == NULL || hdh_p->sec != sec)
   1537   1.1     skrll 		{
   1538   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p = bfd_alloc (htab->etab.dynobj, sizeof *hdh_p);
   1539   1.1     skrll 		  if (hdh_p == NULL)
   1540   1.1     skrll 		    return FALSE;
   1541   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->hdh_next = *hdh_head;
   1542   1.1     skrll 		  *hdh_head = hdh_p;
   1543   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->sec = sec;
   1544   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->count = 0;
   1545   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1546   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->relative_count = 0;
   1547   1.1     skrll #endif
   1548   1.1     skrll 		}
   1549   1.1     skrll 
   1550   1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p->count += 1;
   1551   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1552   1.1     skrll 	      if (!IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (rtype))
   1553   1.1     skrll 		hdh_p->relative_count += 1;
   1554   1.1     skrll #endif
   1555   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1556   1.1     skrll 	}
   1557   1.1     skrll     }
   1558   1.1     skrll 
   1559   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1560   1.1     skrll }
   1561   1.1     skrll 
   1562   1.1     skrll /* Return the section that should be marked against garbage collection
   1563   1.1     skrll    for a given relocation.  */
   1564   1.1     skrll 
   1565   1.1     skrll static asection *
   1566   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_gc_mark_hook (asection *sec,
   1567   1.1     skrll 			 struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1568   1.1     skrll 			 Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
   1569   1.1     skrll 			 struct elf_link_hash_entry *hh,
   1570   1.1     skrll 			 Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   1571   1.1     skrll {
   1572   1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL)
   1573   1.1     skrll     switch ((unsigned int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   1574   1.1     skrll       {
   1575   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1576   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1577   1.1     skrll 	return NULL;
   1578   1.1     skrll       }
   1579   1.1     skrll 
   1580   1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elf_gc_mark_hook (sec, info, rela, hh, sym);
   1581   1.1     skrll }
   1582   1.1     skrll 
   1583   1.1     skrll /* Update the got and plt entry reference counts for the section being
   1584   1.1     skrll    removed.  */
   1585   1.1     skrll 
   1586   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1587   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_gc_sweep_hook (bfd *abfd,
   1588   1.1     skrll 			  struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   1589   1.1     skrll 			  asection *sec,
   1590   1.1     skrll 			  const Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs)
   1591   1.1     skrll {
   1592   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   1593   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_syms;
   1594   1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
   1595   1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma *local_plt_refcounts;
   1596   1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela, *relend;
   1597   1.3  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1598   1.1     skrll 
   1599   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   1600   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1601   1.1     skrll 
   1602   1.3  christos   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1603   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1604   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1605   1.3  christos 
   1606   1.1     skrll   elf_section_data (sec)->local_dynrel = NULL;
   1607   1.1     skrll 
   1608   1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr;
   1609   1.1     skrll   eh_syms = elf_sym_hashes (abfd);
   1610   1.1     skrll   local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
   1611   1.1     skrll   local_plt_refcounts = local_got_refcounts;
   1612   1.1     skrll   if (local_plt_refcounts != NULL)
   1613   1.1     skrll     local_plt_refcounts += symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1614   1.1     skrll 
   1615   1.1     skrll   relend = relocs + sec->reloc_count;
   1616   1.1     skrll   for (rela = relocs; rela < relend; rela++)
   1617   1.1     skrll     {
   1618   1.1     skrll       unsigned long r_symndx;
   1619   1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
   1620   1.1     skrll       struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh = NULL;
   1621   1.1     skrll 
   1622   1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   1623   1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx >= symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   1624   1.1     skrll 	{
   1625   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1626   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry **hdh_pp;
   1627   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   1628   1.1     skrll 
   1629   1.1     skrll 	  eh = eh_syms[r_symndx - symtab_hdr->sh_info];
   1630   1.1     skrll 	  while (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   1631   1.1     skrll 		 || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   1632   1.1     skrll 	    eh = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *) eh->root.u.i.link;
   1633   1.1     skrll 	  hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1634   1.1     skrll 
   1635   1.1     skrll 	  for (hdh_pp = &hh->dyn_relocs; (hdh_p = *hdh_pp) != NULL; hdh_pp = &hdh_p->hdh_next)
   1636   1.1     skrll 	    if (hdh_p->sec == sec)
   1637   1.1     skrll 	      {
   1638   1.1     skrll 		/* Everything must go for SEC.  */
   1639   1.1     skrll 		*hdh_pp = hdh_p->hdh_next;
   1640   1.1     skrll 		break;
   1641   1.1     skrll 	      }
   1642   1.1     skrll 	}
   1643   1.1     skrll 
   1644   1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   1645   1.1     skrll       r_type = elf32_hppa_optimized_tls_reloc (info, r_type, eh != NULL);
   1646   1.1     skrll 
   1647   1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   1648   1.1     skrll 	{
   1649   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   1650   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   1651   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   1652   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   1653   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   1654   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   1655   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   1656   1.1     skrll 	  if (eh != NULL)
   1657   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1658   1.1     skrll 	      if (eh->got.refcount > 0)
   1659   1.1     skrll 		eh->got.refcount -= 1;
   1660   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1661   1.1     skrll 	  else if (local_got_refcounts != NULL)
   1662   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1663   1.1     skrll 	      if (local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] > 0)
   1664   1.1     skrll 		local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] -= 1;
   1665   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1666   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1667   1.1     skrll 
   1668   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   1669   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   1670   1.3  christos 	  htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount -= 1;
   1671   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1672   1.1     skrll 
   1673   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   1674   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   1675   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   1676   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   1677   1.1     skrll 	  if (eh != NULL)
   1678   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1679   1.1     skrll 	      if (eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   1680   1.1     skrll 		eh->plt.refcount -= 1;
   1681   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1682   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1683   1.1     skrll 
   1684   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
   1685   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   1686   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   1687   1.1     skrll 	  if (eh != NULL)
   1688   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1689   1.1     skrll 	      if (eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   1690   1.1     skrll 		eh->plt.refcount -= 1;
   1691   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1692   1.1     skrll 	  else if (local_plt_refcounts != NULL)
   1693   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1694   1.1     skrll 	      if (local_plt_refcounts[r_symndx] > 0)
   1695   1.1     skrll 		local_plt_refcounts[r_symndx] -= 1;
   1696   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1697   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1698   1.1     skrll 
   1699   1.1     skrll 	default:
   1700   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1701   1.1     skrll 	}
   1702   1.1     skrll     }
   1703   1.1     skrll 
   1704   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1705   1.1     skrll }
   1706   1.1     skrll 
   1707   1.1     skrll /* Support for core dump NOTE sections.  */
   1708   1.1     skrll 
   1709   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1710   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_grok_prstatus (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   1711   1.1     skrll {
   1712   1.1     skrll   int offset;
   1713   1.1     skrll   size_t size;
   1714   1.1     skrll 
   1715   1.1     skrll   switch (note->descsz)
   1716   1.1     skrll     {
   1717   1.1     skrll       default:
   1718   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   1719   1.1     skrll 
   1720   1.1     skrll       case 396:		/* Linux/hppa */
   1721   1.1     skrll 	/* pr_cursig */
   1722   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->signal = bfd_get_16 (abfd, note->descdata + 12);
   1723   1.1     skrll 
   1724   1.1     skrll 	/* pr_pid */
   1725   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->lwpid = bfd_get_32 (abfd, note->descdata + 24);
   1726   1.1     skrll 
   1727   1.1     skrll 	/* pr_reg */
   1728   1.1     skrll 	offset = 72;
   1729   1.1     skrll 	size = 320;
   1730   1.1     skrll 
   1731   1.1     skrll 	break;
   1732   1.1     skrll     }
   1733   1.1     skrll 
   1734   1.1     skrll   /* Make a ".reg/999" section.  */
   1735   1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elfcore_make_pseudosection (abfd, ".reg",
   1736   1.1     skrll 					  size, note->descpos + offset);
   1737   1.1     skrll }
   1738   1.1     skrll 
   1739   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1740   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_grok_psinfo (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   1741   1.1     skrll {
   1742   1.1     skrll   switch (note->descsz)
   1743   1.1     skrll     {
   1744   1.1     skrll       default:
   1745   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   1746   1.1     skrll 
   1747   1.1     skrll       case 124:		/* Linux/hppa elf_prpsinfo.  */
   1748   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->program
   1749   1.1     skrll 	  = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 28, 16);
   1750   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command
   1751   1.1     skrll 	  = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 44, 80);
   1752   1.1     skrll     }
   1753   1.1     skrll 
   1754   1.1     skrll   /* Note that for some reason, a spurious space is tacked
   1755   1.1     skrll      onto the end of the args in some (at least one anyway)
   1756   1.1     skrll      implementations, so strip it off if it exists.  */
   1757   1.1     skrll   {
   1758   1.7  christos     char *command = elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command;
   1759   1.1     skrll     int n = strlen (command);
   1760   1.1     skrll 
   1761   1.1     skrll     if (0 < n && command[n - 1] == ' ')
   1762   1.1     skrll       command[n - 1] = '\0';
   1763   1.1     skrll   }
   1764   1.1     skrll 
   1765   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1766   1.1     skrll }
   1767   1.1     skrll 
   1768   1.1     skrll /* Our own version of hide_symbol, so that we can keep plt entries for
   1769   1.1     skrll    plabels.  */
   1770   1.1     skrll 
   1771   1.1     skrll static void
   1772   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_hide_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1773   1.1     skrll 			struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   1774   1.1     skrll 			bfd_boolean force_local)
   1775   1.1     skrll {
   1776   1.1     skrll   if (force_local)
   1777   1.1     skrll     {
   1778   1.1     skrll       eh->forced_local = 1;
   1779   1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx != -1)
   1780   1.1     skrll 	{
   1781   1.1     skrll 	  eh->dynindx = -1;
   1782   1.1     skrll 	  _bfd_elf_strtab_delref (elf_hash_table (info)->dynstr,
   1783   1.1     skrll 				  eh->dynstr_index);
   1784   1.1     skrll 	}
   1785   1.7  christos 
   1786   1.7  christos       /* PR 16082: Remove version information from hidden symbol.  */
   1787   1.7  christos       eh->verinfo.verdef = NULL;
   1788   1.7  christos       eh->verinfo.vertree = NULL;
   1789   1.1     skrll     }
   1790   1.1     skrll 
   1791   1.6  christos   /* STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT.  */
   1792   1.6  christos   if (! hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->plabel
   1793   1.6  christos       && eh->type != STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   1794   1.1     skrll     {
   1795   1.1     skrll       eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1796   1.6  christos       eh->plt = elf_hash_table (info)->init_plt_offset;
   1797   1.1     skrll     }
   1798   1.1     skrll }
   1799   1.1     skrll 
   1800   1.1     skrll /* Adjust a symbol defined by a dynamic object and referenced by a
   1801   1.1     skrll    regular object.  The current definition is in some section of the
   1802   1.1     skrll    dynamic object, but we're not including those sections.  We have to
   1803   1.1     skrll    change the definition to something the rest of the link can
   1804   1.1     skrll    understand.  */
   1805   1.1     skrll 
   1806   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1807   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_adjust_dynamic_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1808   1.1     skrll 				  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh)
   1809   1.1     skrll {
   1810   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1811   1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   1812   1.1     skrll 
   1813   1.1     skrll   /* If this is a function, put it in the procedure linkage table.  We
   1814   1.1     skrll      will fill in the contents of the procedure linkage table later.  */
   1815   1.1     skrll   if (eh->type == STT_FUNC
   1816   1.1     skrll       || eh->needs_plt)
   1817   1.1     skrll     {
   1818   1.6  christos       /* If the symbol is used by a plabel, we must allocate a PLT slot.
   1819   1.6  christos 	 The refcounts are not reliable when it has been hidden since
   1820   1.6  christos 	 hide_symbol can be called before the plabel flag is set.  */
   1821   1.6  christos       if (hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->plabel
   1822   1.6  christos 	  && eh->plt.refcount <= 0)
   1823   1.6  christos 	eh->plt.refcount = 1;
   1824   1.6  christos 
   1825   1.1     skrll       if (eh->plt.refcount <= 0
   1826   1.1     skrll 	  || (eh->def_regular
   1827   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1828   1.1     skrll 	      && ! hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->plabel
   1829   1.7  christos 	      && (!bfd_link_pic (info) || SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, eh))))
   1830   1.1     skrll 	{
   1831   1.1     skrll 	  /* The .plt entry is not needed when:
   1832   1.1     skrll 	     a) Garbage collection has removed all references to the
   1833   1.1     skrll 	     symbol, or
   1834   1.1     skrll 	     b) We know for certain the symbol is defined in this
   1835   1.1     skrll 	     object, and it's not a weak definition, nor is the symbol
   1836   1.1     skrll 	     used by a plabel relocation.  Either this object is the
   1837   1.1     skrll 	     application or we are doing a shared symbolic link.  */
   1838   1.1     skrll 
   1839   1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1840   1.1     skrll 	  eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1841   1.1     skrll 	}
   1842   1.1     skrll 
   1843   1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1844   1.1     skrll     }
   1845   1.1     skrll   else
   1846   1.1     skrll     eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1847   1.1     skrll 
   1848   1.1     skrll   /* If this is a weak symbol, and there is a real definition, the
   1849   1.1     skrll      processor independent code will have arranged for us to see the
   1850   1.1     skrll      real definition first, and we can just use the same value.  */
   1851   1.1     skrll   if (eh->u.weakdef != NULL)
   1852   1.1     skrll     {
   1853   1.1     skrll       if (eh->u.weakdef->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defined
   1854   1.1     skrll 	  && eh->u.weakdef->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   1855   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   1856   1.1     skrll       eh->root.u.def.section = eh->u.weakdef->root.u.def.section;
   1857   1.1     skrll       eh->root.u.def.value = eh->u.weakdef->root.u.def.value;
   1858   1.1     skrll       if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS)
   1859   1.1     skrll 	eh->non_got_ref = eh->u.weakdef->non_got_ref;
   1860   1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1861   1.1     skrll     }
   1862   1.1     skrll 
   1863   1.1     skrll   /* This is a reference to a symbol defined by a dynamic object which
   1864   1.1     skrll      is not a function.  */
   1865   1.1     skrll 
   1866   1.1     skrll   /* If we are creating a shared library, we must presume that the
   1867   1.1     skrll      only references to the symbol are via the global offset table.
   1868   1.1     skrll      For such cases we need not do anything here; the relocations will
   1869   1.1     skrll      be handled correctly by relocate_section.  */
   1870   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1871   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1872   1.1     skrll 
   1873   1.1     skrll   /* If there are no references to this symbol that do not use the
   1874   1.1     skrll      GOT, we don't need to generate a copy reloc.  */
   1875   1.1     skrll   if (!eh->non_got_ref)
   1876   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1877   1.1     skrll 
   1878   1.1     skrll   if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS)
   1879   1.1     skrll     {
   1880   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1881   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   1882   1.1     skrll 
   1883   1.1     skrll       hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1884   1.1     skrll       for (hdh_p = hh->dyn_relocs; hdh_p != NULL; hdh_p = hdh_p->hdh_next)
   1885   1.1     skrll 	{
   1886   1.1     skrll 	  sec = hdh_p->sec->output_section;
   1887   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec != NULL && (sec->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   1888   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   1889   1.1     skrll 	}
   1890   1.1     skrll 
   1891   1.1     skrll       /* If we didn't find any dynamic relocs in read-only sections, then
   1892   1.1     skrll 	 we'll be keeping the dynamic relocs and avoiding the copy reloc.  */
   1893   1.1     skrll       if (hdh_p == NULL)
   1894   1.1     skrll 	{
   1895   1.1     skrll 	  eh->non_got_ref = 0;
   1896   1.1     skrll 	  return TRUE;
   1897   1.1     skrll 	}
   1898   1.1     skrll     }
   1899   1.1     skrll 
   1900   1.1     skrll   /* We must allocate the symbol in our .dynbss section, which will
   1901   1.1     skrll      become part of the .bss section of the executable.  There will be
   1902   1.1     skrll      an entry for this symbol in the .dynsym section.  The dynamic
   1903   1.1     skrll      object will contain position independent code, so all references
   1904   1.1     skrll      from the dynamic object to this symbol will go through the global
   1905   1.1     skrll      offset table.  The dynamic linker will use the .dynsym entry to
   1906   1.1     skrll      determine the address it must put in the global offset table, so
   1907   1.1     skrll      both the dynamic object and the regular object will refer to the
   1908   1.1     skrll      same memory location for the variable.  */
   1909   1.1     skrll 
   1910   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1911   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1912   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1913   1.1     skrll 
   1914   1.1     skrll   /* We must generate a COPY reloc to tell the dynamic linker to
   1915   1.1     skrll      copy the initial value out of the dynamic object and into the
   1916   1.1     skrll      runtime process image.  */
   1917   1.6  christos   if ((eh->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0 && eh->size != 0)
   1918   1.1     skrll     {
   1919   1.1     skrll       htab->srelbss->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   1920   1.1     skrll       eh->needs_copy = 1;
   1921   1.1     skrll     }
   1922   1.1     skrll 
   1923   1.1     skrll   sec = htab->sdynbss;
   1924   1.1     skrll 
   1925   1.7  christos   return _bfd_elf_adjust_dynamic_copy (info, eh, sec);
   1926   1.1     skrll }
   1927   1.1     skrll 
   1928   1.1     skrll /* Allocate space in the .plt for entries that won't have relocations.
   1929   1.1     skrll    ie. plabel entries.  */
   1930   1.1     skrll 
   1931   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1932   1.1     skrll allocate_plt_static (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   1933   1.1     skrll {
   1934   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
   1935   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1936   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1937   1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   1938   1.1     skrll 
   1939   1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1940   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1941   1.1     skrll 
   1942   1.1     skrll   info = (struct bfd_link_info *) inf;
   1943   1.1     skrll   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1944   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1945   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1946   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1947   1.3  christos 
   1948   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   1949   1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   1950   1.1     skrll     {
   1951   1.1     skrll       /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   1952   1.1     skrll 	 Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   1953   1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx == -1
   1954   1.1     skrll 	  && !eh->forced_local
   1955   1.1     skrll 	  && eh->type != STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   1956   1.1     skrll 	{
   1957   1.1     skrll 	  if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh))
   1958   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1959   1.1     skrll 	}
   1960   1.1     skrll 
   1961   1.7  christos       if (WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1, bfd_link_pic (info), eh))
   1962   1.1     skrll 	{
   1963   1.1     skrll 	  /* Allocate these later.  From this point on, h->plabel
   1964   1.1     skrll 	     means that the plt entry is only used by a plabel.
   1965   1.1     skrll 	     We'll be using a normal plt entry for this symbol, so
   1966   1.1     skrll 	     clear the plabel indicator.  */
   1967   1.7  christos 
   1968   1.1     skrll 	  hh->plabel = 0;
   1969   1.1     skrll 	}
   1970   1.1     skrll       else if (hh->plabel)
   1971   1.1     skrll 	{
   1972   1.1     skrll 	  /* Make an entry in the .plt section for plabel references
   1973   1.1     skrll 	     that won't have a .plt entry for other reasons.  */
   1974   1.1     skrll 	  sec = htab->splt;
   1975   1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = sec->size;
   1976   1.1     skrll 	  sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1977   1.1     skrll 	}
   1978   1.1     skrll       else
   1979   1.1     skrll 	{
   1980   1.1     skrll 	  /* No .plt entry needed.  */
   1981   1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1982   1.1     skrll 	  eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1983   1.1     skrll 	}
   1984   1.1     skrll     }
   1985   1.1     skrll   else
   1986   1.1     skrll     {
   1987   1.1     skrll       eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1988   1.1     skrll       eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1989   1.1     skrll     }
   1990   1.1     skrll 
   1991   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1992   1.1     skrll }
   1993   1.1     skrll 
   1994   1.1     skrll /* Allocate space in .plt, .got and associated reloc sections for
   1995   1.1     skrll    global syms.  */
   1996   1.1     skrll 
   1997   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1998   1.1     skrll allocate_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   1999   1.1     skrll {
   2000   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
   2001   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   2002   1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   2003   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2004   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   2005   1.1     skrll 
   2006   1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   2007   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   2008   1.1     skrll 
   2009   1.1     skrll   info = inf;
   2010   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2011   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2012   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   2013   1.3  christos 
   2014   1.1     skrll   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   2015   1.7  christos 
   2016   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   2017   1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   2018   1.1     skrll       && !hh->plabel
   2019   1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   2020   1.1     skrll     {
   2021   1.1     skrll       /* Make an entry in the .plt section.  */
   2022   1.1     skrll       sec = htab->splt;
   2023   1.1     skrll       eh->plt.offset = sec->size;
   2024   1.1     skrll       sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2025   1.1     skrll 
   2026   1.1     skrll       /* We also need to make an entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   2027   1.1     skrll       htab->srelplt->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2028   1.1     skrll       htab->need_plt_stub = 1;
   2029   1.1     skrll     }
   2030   1.1     skrll 
   2031   1.1     skrll   if (eh->got.refcount > 0)
   2032   1.1     skrll     {
   2033   1.1     skrll       /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   2034   1.1     skrll 	 Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   2035   1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx == -1
   2036   1.1     skrll 	  && !eh->forced_local
   2037   1.1     skrll 	  && eh->type != STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   2038   1.1     skrll 	{
   2039   1.1     skrll 	  if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh))
   2040   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2041   1.1     skrll 	}
   2042   1.1     skrll 
   2043   1.1     skrll       sec = htab->sgot;
   2044   1.1     skrll       eh->got.offset = sec->size;
   2045   1.1     skrll       sec->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2046   1.1     skrll       /* R_PARISC_TLS_GD* needs two GOT entries */
   2047   1.1     skrll       if ((hh->tls_type & (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE)) == (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE))
   2048   1.1     skrll       	sec->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE * 2;
   2049   1.1     skrll       else if ((hh->tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) == GOT_TLS_GD)
   2050   1.1     skrll       	sec->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2051   1.1     skrll       if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   2052   1.7  christos 	  && (bfd_link_pic (info)
   2053   1.1     skrll 	      || (eh->dynindx != -1
   2054   1.1     skrll 		  && !eh->forced_local)))
   2055   1.1     skrll 	{
   2056   1.1     skrll 	  htab->srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2057   1.1     skrll 	  if ((hh->tls_type & (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE)) == (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE))
   2058   1.1     skrll 	    htab->srelgot->size += 2 * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2059   1.1     skrll 	  else if ((hh->tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) == GOT_TLS_GD)
   2060   1.1     skrll 	    htab->srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2061   1.1     skrll 	}
   2062   1.1     skrll     }
   2063   1.1     skrll   else
   2064   1.1     skrll     eh->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2065   1.1     skrll 
   2066   1.1     skrll   if (hh->dyn_relocs == NULL)
   2067   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   2068   1.1     skrll 
   2069   1.1     skrll   /* If this is a -Bsymbolic shared link, then we need to discard all
   2070   1.1     skrll      space allocated for dynamic pc-relative relocs against symbols
   2071   1.1     skrll      defined in a regular object.  For the normal shared case, discard
   2072   1.1     skrll      space for relocs that have become local due to symbol visibility
   2073   1.1     skrll      changes.  */
   2074   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2075   1.1     skrll     {
   2076   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   2077   1.1     skrll       if (SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, eh))
   2078   1.1     skrll 	{
   2079   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry **hdh_pp;
   2080   1.1     skrll 
   2081   1.1     skrll 	  for (hdh_pp = &hh->dyn_relocs; (hdh_p = *hdh_pp) != NULL; )
   2082   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2083   1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p->count -= hdh_p->relative_count;
   2084   1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p->relative_count = 0;
   2085   1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_p->count == 0)
   2086   1.1     skrll 		*hdh_pp = hdh_p->hdh_next;
   2087   1.1     skrll 	      else
   2088   1.1     skrll 		hdh_pp = &hdh_p->hdh_next;
   2089   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2090   1.1     skrll 	}
   2091   1.1     skrll #endif
   2092   1.1     skrll 
   2093   1.1     skrll       /* Also discard relocs on undefined weak syms with non-default
   2094   1.1     skrll 	 visibility.  */
   2095   1.1     skrll       if (hh->dyn_relocs != NULL
   2096   1.1     skrll 	  && eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   2097   1.1     skrll 	{
   2098   1.1     skrll 	  if (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (eh->other) != STV_DEFAULT)
   2099   1.1     skrll 	    hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   2100   1.1     skrll 
   2101   1.1     skrll 	  /* Make sure undefined weak symbols are output as a dynamic
   2102   1.1     skrll 	     symbol in PIEs.  */
   2103   1.1     skrll 	  else if (eh->dynindx == -1
   2104   1.1     skrll 		   && !eh->forced_local)
   2105   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2106   1.1     skrll 	      if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh))
   2107   1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   2108   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2109   1.1     skrll 	}
   2110   1.1     skrll     }
   2111   1.1     skrll   else
   2112   1.1     skrll     {
   2113   1.1     skrll       /* For the non-shared case, discard space for relocs against
   2114   1.1     skrll 	 symbols which turn out to need copy relocs or are not
   2115   1.1     skrll 	 dynamic.  */
   2116   1.7  christos 
   2117   1.1     skrll       if (!eh->non_got_ref
   2118   1.1     skrll 	  && ((ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   2119   1.1     skrll 	       && eh->def_dynamic
   2120   1.1     skrll 	       && !eh->def_regular)
   2121   1.1     skrll 	       || (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   2122   1.1     skrll 		   && (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   2123   1.1     skrll 		       || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined))))
   2124   1.1     skrll 	{
   2125   1.1     skrll 	  /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   2126   1.1     skrll 	     Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   2127   1.1     skrll 	  if (eh->dynindx == -1
   2128   1.1     skrll 	      && !eh->forced_local
   2129   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->type != STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   2130   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2131   1.1     skrll 	      if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh))
   2132   1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   2133   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2134   1.1     skrll 
   2135   1.1     skrll 	  /* If that succeeded, we know we'll be keeping all the
   2136   1.1     skrll 	     relocs.  */
   2137   1.1     skrll 	  if (eh->dynindx != -1)
   2138   1.1     skrll 	    goto keep;
   2139   1.1     skrll 	}
   2140   1.1     skrll 
   2141   1.1     skrll       hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   2142   1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   2143   1.1     skrll 
   2144   1.1     skrll     keep: ;
   2145   1.1     skrll     }
   2146   1.1     skrll 
   2147   1.1     skrll   /* Finally, allocate space.  */
   2148   1.1     skrll   for (hdh_p = hh->dyn_relocs; hdh_p != NULL; hdh_p = hdh_p->hdh_next)
   2149   1.1     skrll     {
   2150   1.1     skrll       asection *sreloc = elf_section_data (hdh_p->sec)->sreloc;
   2151   1.1     skrll       sreloc->size += hdh_p->count * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2152   1.1     skrll     }
   2153   1.1     skrll 
   2154   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2155   1.1     skrll }
   2156   1.1     skrll 
   2157   1.1     skrll /* This function is called via elf_link_hash_traverse to force
   2158   1.1     skrll    millicode symbols local so they do not end up as globals in the
   2159   1.1     skrll    dynamic symbol table.  We ought to be able to do this in
   2160   1.1     skrll    adjust_dynamic_symbol, but our adjust_dynamic_symbol is not called
   2161   1.1     skrll    for all dynamic symbols.  Arguably, this is a bug in
   2162   1.1     skrll    elf_adjust_dynamic_symbol.  */
   2163   1.1     skrll 
   2164   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2165   1.1     skrll clobber_millicode_symbols (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   2166   1.1     skrll 			   struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2167   1.1     skrll {
   2168   1.1     skrll   if (eh->type == STT_PARISC_MILLI
   2169   1.1     skrll       && !eh->forced_local)
   2170   1.1     skrll     {
   2171   1.1     skrll       elf32_hppa_hide_symbol (info, eh, TRUE);
   2172   1.1     skrll     }
   2173   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2174   1.1     skrll }
   2175   1.1     skrll 
   2176   1.1     skrll /* Find any dynamic relocs that apply to read-only sections.  */
   2177   1.1     skrll 
   2178   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2179   1.1     skrll readonly_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   2180   1.1     skrll {
   2181   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2182   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   2183   1.1     skrll 
   2184   1.1     skrll   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   2185   1.1     skrll   for (hdh_p = hh->dyn_relocs; hdh_p != NULL; hdh_p = hdh_p->hdh_next)
   2186   1.1     skrll     {
   2187   1.1     skrll       asection *sec = hdh_p->sec->output_section;
   2188   1.1     skrll 
   2189   1.1     skrll       if (sec != NULL && (sec->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   2190   1.1     skrll 	{
   2191   1.1     skrll 	  struct bfd_link_info *info = inf;
   2192   1.1     skrll 
   2193   1.2     skrll           if (info->warn_shared_textrel)
   2194   1.2     skrll             (*_bfd_error_handler)
   2195   1.8  christos               (_("warning: dynamic relocation to `%s' in readonly section `%s'"),
   2196   1.8  christos               eh->root.root.string, sec->name);
   2197   1.1     skrll 	  info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   2198   1.1     skrll 
   2199   1.1     skrll 	  /* Not an error, just cut short the traversal.  */
   2200   1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
   2201   1.1     skrll 	}
   2202   1.1     skrll     }
   2203   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2204   1.1     skrll }
   2205   1.1     skrll 
   2206   1.1     skrll /* Set the sizes of the dynamic sections.  */
   2207   1.1     skrll 
   2208   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2209   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_size_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   2210   1.1     skrll 				  struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2211   1.1     skrll {
   2212   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   2213   1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   2214   1.1     skrll   bfd *ibfd;
   2215   1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   2216   1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean relocs;
   2217   1.1     skrll 
   2218   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2219   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2220   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   2221   1.3  christos 
   2222   1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->etab.dynobj;
   2223   1.1     skrll   if (dynobj == NULL)
   2224   1.1     skrll     abort ();
   2225   1.1     skrll 
   2226   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2227   1.1     skrll     {
   2228   1.1     skrll       /* Set the contents of the .interp section to the interpreter.  */
   2229   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_executable (info) && !info->nointerp)
   2230   1.1     skrll 	{
   2231   1.6  christos 	  sec = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".interp");
   2232   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec == NULL)
   2233   1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2234   1.1     skrll 	  sec->size = sizeof ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   2235   1.1     skrll 	  sec->contents = (unsigned char *) ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   2236   1.1     skrll 	}
   2237   1.1     skrll 
   2238   1.1     skrll       /* Force millicode symbols local.  */
   2239   1.1     skrll       elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab,
   2240   1.1     skrll 			      clobber_millicode_symbols,
   2241   1.1     skrll 			      info);
   2242   1.1     skrll     }
   2243   1.1     skrll 
   2244   1.1     skrll   /* Set up .got and .plt offsets for local syms, and space for local
   2245   1.1     skrll      dynamic relocs.  */
   2246   1.7  christos   for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next)
   2247   1.1     skrll     {
   2248   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *local_got;
   2249   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *end_local_got;
   2250   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *local_plt;
   2251   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *end_local_plt;
   2252   1.1     skrll       bfd_size_type locsymcount;
   2253   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2254   1.1     skrll       asection *srel;
   2255   1.1     skrll       char *local_tls_type;
   2256   1.1     skrll 
   2257   1.1     skrll       if (bfd_get_flavour (ibfd) != bfd_target_elf_flavour)
   2258   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2259   1.1     skrll 
   2260   1.1     skrll       for (sec = ibfd->sections; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
   2261   1.1     skrll 	{
   2262   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   2263   1.1     skrll 
   2264   1.1     skrll 	  for (hdh_p = ((struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *)
   2265   1.1     skrll 		    elf_section_data (sec)->local_dynrel);
   2266   1.1     skrll 	       hdh_p != NULL;
   2267   1.1     skrll 	       hdh_p = hdh_p->hdh_next)
   2268   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2269   1.1     skrll 	      if (!bfd_is_abs_section (hdh_p->sec)
   2270   1.1     skrll 		  && bfd_is_abs_section (hdh_p->sec->output_section))
   2271   1.1     skrll 		{
   2272   1.1     skrll 		  /* Input section has been discarded, either because
   2273   1.1     skrll 		     it is a copy of a linkonce section or due to
   2274   1.1     skrll 		     linker script /DISCARD/, so we'll be discarding
   2275   1.1     skrll 		     the relocs too.  */
   2276   1.1     skrll 		}
   2277   1.1     skrll 	      else if (hdh_p->count != 0)
   2278   1.1     skrll 		{
   2279   1.1     skrll 		  srel = elf_section_data (hdh_p->sec)->sreloc;
   2280   1.1     skrll 		  srel->size += hdh_p->count * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2281   1.1     skrll 		  if ((hdh_p->sec->output_section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   2282   1.1     skrll 		    info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   2283   1.1     skrll 		}
   2284   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2285   1.1     skrll 	}
   2286   1.1     skrll 
   2287   1.1     skrll       local_got = elf_local_got_refcounts (ibfd);
   2288   1.1     skrll       if (!local_got)
   2289   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2290   1.1     skrll 
   2291   1.1     skrll       symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (ibfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2292   1.1     skrll       locsymcount = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   2293   1.1     skrll       end_local_got = local_got + locsymcount;
   2294   1.1     skrll       local_tls_type = hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (ibfd);
   2295   1.1     skrll       sec = htab->sgot;
   2296   1.1     skrll       srel = htab->srelgot;
   2297   1.1     skrll       for (; local_got < end_local_got; ++local_got)
   2298   1.1     skrll 	{
   2299   1.1     skrll 	  if (*local_got > 0)
   2300   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2301   1.1     skrll 	      *local_got = sec->size;
   2302   1.1     skrll 	      sec->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2303   1.1     skrll 	      if ((*local_tls_type & (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE)) == (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE))
   2304   1.1     skrll 		sec->size += 2 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2305   1.1     skrll 	      else if ((*local_tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) == GOT_TLS_GD)
   2306   1.1     skrll 		sec->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2307   1.7  christos 	      if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2308   1.1     skrll 	        {
   2309   1.1     skrll 		  srel->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2310   1.1     skrll 		  if ((*local_tls_type & (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE)) == (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE))
   2311   1.1     skrll 		    srel->size += 2 * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2312   1.1     skrll 		  else if ((*local_tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) == GOT_TLS_GD)
   2313   1.1     skrll 		    srel->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2314   1.1     skrll 	        }
   2315   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2316   1.1     skrll 	  else
   2317   1.1     skrll 	    *local_got = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2318   1.1     skrll 
   2319   1.1     skrll 	  ++local_tls_type;
   2320   1.1     skrll 	}
   2321   1.1     skrll 
   2322   1.1     skrll       local_plt = end_local_got;
   2323   1.1     skrll       end_local_plt = local_plt + locsymcount;
   2324   1.1     skrll       if (! htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2325   1.1     skrll 	{
   2326   1.1     skrll 	  /* Won't be used, but be safe.  */
   2327   1.1     skrll 	  for (; local_plt < end_local_plt; ++local_plt)
   2328   1.1     skrll 	    *local_plt = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2329   1.1     skrll 	}
   2330   1.1     skrll       else
   2331   1.1     skrll 	{
   2332   1.1     skrll 	  sec = htab->splt;
   2333   1.1     skrll 	  srel = htab->srelplt;
   2334   1.1     skrll 	  for (; local_plt < end_local_plt; ++local_plt)
   2335   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2336   1.1     skrll 	      if (*local_plt > 0)
   2337   1.1     skrll 		{
   2338   1.1     skrll 		  *local_plt = sec->size;
   2339   1.1     skrll 		  sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2340   1.7  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2341   1.1     skrll 		    srel->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2342   1.1     skrll 		}
   2343   1.1     skrll 	      else
   2344   1.1     skrll 		*local_plt = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2345   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2346   1.1     skrll 	}
   2347   1.1     skrll     }
   2348   1.7  christos 
   2349   1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount > 0)
   2350   1.1     skrll     {
   2351   1.7  christos       /* Allocate 2 got entries and 1 dynamic reloc for
   2352   1.1     skrll          R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32 relocs.  */
   2353   1.1     skrll       htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = htab->sgot->size;
   2354   1.1     skrll       htab->sgot->size += (GOT_ENTRY_SIZE * 2);
   2355   1.1     skrll       htab->srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2356   1.1     skrll     }
   2357   1.1     skrll   else
   2358   1.1     skrll     htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = -1;
   2359   1.1     skrll 
   2360   1.1     skrll   /* Do all the .plt entries without relocs first.  The dynamic linker
   2361   1.1     skrll      uses the last .plt reloc to find the end of the .plt (and hence
   2362   1.1     skrll      the start of the .got) for lazy linking.  */
   2363   1.1     skrll   elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, allocate_plt_static, info);
   2364   1.1     skrll 
   2365   1.1     skrll   /* Allocate global sym .plt and .got entries, and space for global
   2366   1.1     skrll      sym dynamic relocs.  */
   2367   1.1     skrll   elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, allocate_dynrelocs, info);
   2368   1.1     skrll 
   2369   1.1     skrll   /* The check_relocs and adjust_dynamic_symbol entry points have
   2370   1.1     skrll      determined the sizes of the various dynamic sections.  Allocate
   2371   1.1     skrll      memory for them.  */
   2372   1.1     skrll   relocs = FALSE;
   2373   1.1     skrll   for (sec = dynobj->sections; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
   2374   1.1     skrll     {
   2375   1.1     skrll       if ((sec->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
   2376   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2377   1.1     skrll 
   2378   1.1     skrll       if (sec == htab->splt)
   2379   1.1     skrll 	{
   2380   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->need_plt_stub)
   2381   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2382   1.1     skrll 	      /* Make space for the plt stub at the end of the .plt
   2383   1.1     skrll 		 section.  We want this stub right at the end, up
   2384   1.1     skrll 		 against the .got section.  */
   2385   1.1     skrll 	      int gotalign = bfd_section_alignment (dynobj, htab->sgot);
   2386   1.1     skrll 	      int pltalign = bfd_section_alignment (dynobj, sec);
   2387   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_size_type mask;
   2388   1.1     skrll 
   2389   1.1     skrll 	      if (gotalign > pltalign)
   2390   1.7  christos 		(void) bfd_set_section_alignment (dynobj, sec, gotalign);
   2391   1.1     skrll 	      mask = ((bfd_size_type) 1 << gotalign) - 1;
   2392   1.1     skrll 	      sec->size = (sec->size + sizeof (plt_stub) + mask) & ~mask;
   2393   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2394   1.1     skrll 	}
   2395   1.1     skrll       else if (sec == htab->sgot
   2396   1.1     skrll 	       || sec == htab->sdynbss)
   2397   1.1     skrll 	;
   2398   1.1     skrll       else if (CONST_STRNEQ (bfd_get_section_name (dynobj, sec), ".rela"))
   2399   1.1     skrll 	{
   2400   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec->size != 0)
   2401   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2402   1.1     skrll 	      /* Remember whether there are any reloc sections other
   2403   1.1     skrll 		 than .rela.plt.  */
   2404   1.1     skrll 	      if (sec != htab->srelplt)
   2405   1.1     skrll 		relocs = TRUE;
   2406   1.1     skrll 
   2407   1.1     skrll 	      /* We use the reloc_count field as a counter if we need
   2408   1.1     skrll 		 to copy relocs into the output file.  */
   2409   1.1     skrll 	      sec->reloc_count = 0;
   2410   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2411   1.1     skrll 	}
   2412   1.1     skrll       else
   2413   1.1     skrll 	{
   2414   1.1     skrll 	  /* It's not one of our sections, so don't allocate space.  */
   2415   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2416   1.1     skrll 	}
   2417   1.1     skrll 
   2418   1.1     skrll       if (sec->size == 0)
   2419   1.1     skrll 	{
   2420   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we don't need this section, strip it from the
   2421   1.1     skrll 	     output file.  This is mostly to handle .rela.bss and
   2422   1.1     skrll 	     .rela.plt.  We must create both sections in
   2423   1.1     skrll 	     create_dynamic_sections, because they must be created
   2424   1.1     skrll 	     before the linker maps input sections to output
   2425   1.1     skrll 	     sections.  The linker does that before
   2426   1.1     skrll 	     adjust_dynamic_symbol is called, and it is that
   2427   1.1     skrll 	     function which decides whether anything needs to go
   2428   1.1     skrll 	     into these sections.  */
   2429   1.1     skrll 	  sec->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
   2430   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2431   1.1     skrll 	}
   2432   1.1     skrll 
   2433   1.1     skrll       if ((sec->flags & SEC_HAS_CONTENTS) == 0)
   2434   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2435   1.1     skrll 
   2436   1.1     skrll       /* Allocate memory for the section contents.  Zero it, because
   2437   1.1     skrll 	 we may not fill in all the reloc sections.  */
   2438   1.1     skrll       sec->contents = bfd_zalloc (dynobj, sec->size);
   2439   1.1     skrll       if (sec->contents == NULL)
   2440   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   2441   1.1     skrll     }
   2442   1.1     skrll 
   2443   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2444   1.1     skrll     {
   2445   1.1     skrll       /* Like IA-64 and HPPA64, always create a DT_PLTGOT.  It
   2446   1.1     skrll 	 actually has nothing to do with the PLT, it is how we
   2447   1.1     skrll 	 communicate the LTP value of a load module to the dynamic
   2448   1.1     skrll 	 linker.  */
   2449   1.1     skrll #define add_dynamic_entry(TAG, VAL) \
   2450   1.1     skrll   _bfd_elf_add_dynamic_entry (info, TAG, VAL)
   2451   1.1     skrll 
   2452   1.1     skrll       if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTGOT, 0))
   2453   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   2454   1.1     skrll 
   2455   1.1     skrll       /* Add some entries to the .dynamic section.  We fill in the
   2456   1.1     skrll 	 values later, in elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections, but we
   2457   1.1     skrll 	 must add the entries now so that we get the correct size for
   2458   1.1     skrll 	 the .dynamic section.  The DT_DEBUG entry is filled in by the
   2459   1.1     skrll 	 dynamic linker and used by the debugger.  */
   2460   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_executable (info))
   2461   1.1     skrll 	{
   2462   1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_DEBUG, 0))
   2463   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2464   1.1     skrll 	}
   2465   1.1     skrll 
   2466   1.1     skrll       if (htab->srelplt->size != 0)
   2467   1.1     skrll 	{
   2468   1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTRELSZ, 0)
   2469   1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTREL, DT_RELA)
   2470   1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_JMPREL, 0))
   2471   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2472   1.1     skrll 	}
   2473   1.1     skrll 
   2474   1.1     skrll       if (relocs)
   2475   1.1     skrll 	{
   2476   1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELA, 0)
   2477   1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELASZ, 0)
   2478   1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELAENT, sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela)))
   2479   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2480   1.1     skrll 
   2481   1.1     skrll 	  /* If any dynamic relocs apply to a read-only section,
   2482   1.1     skrll 	     then we need a DT_TEXTREL entry.  */
   2483   1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->flags & DF_TEXTREL) == 0)
   2484   1.1     skrll 	    elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, readonly_dynrelocs, info);
   2485   1.1     skrll 
   2486   1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->flags & DF_TEXTREL) != 0)
   2487   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2488   1.1     skrll 	      if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_TEXTREL, 0))
   2489   1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   2490   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2491   1.1     skrll 	}
   2492   1.1     skrll     }
   2493   1.1     skrll #undef add_dynamic_entry
   2494   1.1     skrll 
   2495   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2496   1.1     skrll }
   2497   1.1     skrll 
   2498   1.1     skrll /* External entry points for sizing and building linker stubs.  */
   2499   1.1     skrll 
   2500   1.1     skrll /* Set up various things so that we can make a list of input sections
   2501   1.1     skrll    for each output section included in the link.  Returns -1 on error,
   2502   1.1     skrll    0 when no stubs will be needed, and 1 on success.  */
   2503   1.1     skrll 
   2504   1.1     skrll int
   2505   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_setup_section_lists (bfd *output_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2506   1.1     skrll {
   2507   1.1     skrll   bfd *input_bfd;
   2508   1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_count;
   2509   1.7  christos   unsigned int top_id, top_index;
   2510   1.1     skrll   asection *section;
   2511   1.1     skrll   asection **input_list, **list;
   2512   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt;
   2513   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2514   1.1     skrll 
   2515   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2516   1.3  christos     return -1;
   2517   1.3  christos 
   2518   1.1     skrll   /* Count the number of input BFDs and find the top input section id.  */
   2519   1.1     skrll   for (input_bfd = info->input_bfds, bfd_count = 0, top_id = 0;
   2520   1.1     skrll        input_bfd != NULL;
   2521   1.7  christos        input_bfd = input_bfd->link.next)
   2522   1.1     skrll     {
   2523   1.1     skrll       bfd_count += 1;
   2524   1.1     skrll       for (section = input_bfd->sections;
   2525   1.1     skrll 	   section != NULL;
   2526   1.1     skrll 	   section = section->next)
   2527   1.1     skrll 	{
   2528   1.1     skrll 	  if (top_id < section->id)
   2529   1.1     skrll 	    top_id = section->id;
   2530   1.1     skrll 	}
   2531   1.1     skrll     }
   2532   1.1     skrll   htab->bfd_count = bfd_count;
   2533   1.1     skrll 
   2534   1.1     skrll   amt = sizeof (struct map_stub) * (top_id + 1);
   2535   1.1     skrll   htab->stub_group = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
   2536   1.1     skrll   if (htab->stub_group == NULL)
   2537   1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2538   1.1     skrll 
   2539   1.1     skrll   /* We can't use output_bfd->section_count here to find the top output
   2540   1.1     skrll      section index as some sections may have been removed, and
   2541   1.1     skrll      strip_excluded_output_sections doesn't renumber the indices.  */
   2542   1.1     skrll   for (section = output_bfd->sections, top_index = 0;
   2543   1.1     skrll        section != NULL;
   2544   1.1     skrll        section = section->next)
   2545   1.1     skrll     {
   2546   1.1     skrll       if (top_index < section->index)
   2547   1.1     skrll 	top_index = section->index;
   2548   1.1     skrll     }
   2549   1.1     skrll 
   2550   1.1     skrll   htab->top_index = top_index;
   2551   1.1     skrll   amt = sizeof (asection *) * (top_index + 1);
   2552   1.1     skrll   input_list = bfd_malloc (amt);
   2553   1.1     skrll   htab->input_list = input_list;
   2554   1.1     skrll   if (input_list == NULL)
   2555   1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2556   1.1     skrll 
   2557   1.1     skrll   /* For sections we aren't interested in, mark their entries with a
   2558   1.1     skrll      value we can check later.  */
   2559   1.1     skrll   list = input_list + top_index;
   2560   1.1     skrll   do
   2561   1.1     skrll     *list = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
   2562   1.1     skrll   while (list-- != input_list);
   2563   1.1     skrll 
   2564   1.1     skrll   for (section = output_bfd->sections;
   2565   1.1     skrll        section != NULL;
   2566   1.1     skrll        section = section->next)
   2567   1.1     skrll     {
   2568   1.1     skrll       if ((section->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   2569   1.1     skrll 	input_list[section->index] = NULL;
   2570   1.1     skrll     }
   2571   1.1     skrll 
   2572   1.1     skrll   return 1;
   2573   1.1     skrll }
   2574   1.1     skrll 
   2575   1.1     skrll /* The linker repeatedly calls this function for each input section,
   2576   1.1     skrll    in the order that input sections are linked into output sections.
   2577   1.1     skrll    Build lists of input sections to determine groupings between which
   2578   1.1     skrll    we may insert linker stubs.  */
   2579   1.1     skrll 
   2580   1.1     skrll void
   2581   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_next_input_section (struct bfd_link_info *info, asection *isec)
   2582   1.1     skrll {
   2583   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2584   1.1     skrll 
   2585   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2586   1.3  christos     return;
   2587   1.3  christos 
   2588   1.1     skrll   if (isec->output_section->index <= htab->top_index)
   2589   1.1     skrll     {
   2590   1.1     skrll       asection **list = htab->input_list + isec->output_section->index;
   2591   1.1     skrll       if (*list != bfd_abs_section_ptr)
   2592   1.1     skrll 	{
   2593   1.1     skrll 	  /* Steal the link_sec pointer for our list.  */
   2594   1.1     skrll #define PREV_SEC(sec) (htab->stub_group[(sec)->id].link_sec)
   2595   1.1     skrll 	  /* This happens to make the list in reverse order,
   2596   1.1     skrll 	     which is what we want.  */
   2597   1.1     skrll 	  PREV_SEC (isec) = *list;
   2598   1.1     skrll 	  *list = isec;
   2599   1.1     skrll 	}
   2600   1.1     skrll     }
   2601   1.1     skrll }
   2602   1.1     skrll 
   2603   1.1     skrll /* See whether we can group stub sections together.  Grouping stub
   2604   1.1     skrll    sections may result in fewer stubs.  More importantly, we need to
   2605   1.1     skrll    put all .init* and .fini* stubs at the beginning of the .init or
   2606   1.1     skrll    .fini output sections respectively, because glibc splits the
   2607   1.1     skrll    _init and _fini functions into multiple parts.  Putting a stub in
   2608   1.1     skrll    the middle of a function is not a good idea.  */
   2609   1.1     skrll 
   2610   1.1     skrll static void
   2611   1.1     skrll group_sections (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab,
   2612   1.1     skrll 		bfd_size_type stub_group_size,
   2613   1.1     skrll 		bfd_boolean stubs_always_before_branch)
   2614   1.1     skrll {
   2615   1.1     skrll   asection **list = htab->input_list + htab->top_index;
   2616   1.1     skrll   do
   2617   1.1     skrll     {
   2618   1.1     skrll       asection *tail = *list;
   2619   1.1     skrll       if (tail == bfd_abs_section_ptr)
   2620   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2621   1.1     skrll       while (tail != NULL)
   2622   1.1     skrll 	{
   2623   1.1     skrll 	  asection *curr;
   2624   1.1     skrll 	  asection *prev;
   2625   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_size_type total;
   2626   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_boolean big_sec;
   2627   1.1     skrll 
   2628   1.1     skrll 	  curr = tail;
   2629   1.1     skrll 	  total = tail->size;
   2630   1.1     skrll 	  big_sec = total >= stub_group_size;
   2631   1.1     skrll 
   2632   1.1     skrll 	  while ((prev = PREV_SEC (curr)) != NULL
   2633   1.1     skrll 		 && ((total += curr->output_offset - prev->output_offset)
   2634   1.1     skrll 		     < stub_group_size))
   2635   1.1     skrll 	    curr = prev;
   2636   1.1     skrll 
   2637   1.1     skrll 	  /* OK, the size from the start of CURR to the end is less
   2638   1.1     skrll 	     than 240000 bytes and thus can be handled by one stub
   2639   1.1     skrll 	     section.  (or the tail section is itself larger than
   2640   1.1     skrll 	     240000 bytes, in which case we may be toast.)
   2641   1.1     skrll 	     We should really be keeping track of the total size of
   2642   1.1     skrll 	     stubs added here, as stubs contribute to the final output
   2643   1.1     skrll 	     section size.  That's a little tricky, and this way will
   2644   1.1     skrll 	     only break if stubs added total more than 22144 bytes, or
   2645   1.1     skrll 	     2768 long branch stubs.  It seems unlikely for more than
   2646   1.1     skrll 	     2768 different functions to be called, especially from
   2647   1.1     skrll 	     code only 240000 bytes long.  This limit used to be
   2648   1.1     skrll 	     250000, but c++ code tends to generate lots of little
   2649   1.1     skrll 	     functions, and sometimes violated the assumption.  */
   2650   1.1     skrll 	  do
   2651   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2652   1.1     skrll 	      prev = PREV_SEC (tail);
   2653   1.1     skrll 	      /* Set up this stub group.  */
   2654   1.1     skrll 	      htab->stub_group[tail->id].link_sec = curr;
   2655   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2656   1.1     skrll 	  while (tail != curr && (tail = prev) != NULL);
   2657   1.1     skrll 
   2658   1.1     skrll 	  /* But wait, there's more!  Input sections up to 240000
   2659   1.1     skrll 	     bytes before the stub section can be handled by it too.
   2660   1.1     skrll 	     Don't do this if we have a really large section after the
   2661   1.1     skrll 	     stubs, as adding more stubs increases the chance that
   2662   1.1     skrll 	     branches may not reach into the stub section.  */
   2663   1.1     skrll 	  if (!stubs_always_before_branch && !big_sec)
   2664   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2665   1.1     skrll 	      total = 0;
   2666   1.1     skrll 	      while (prev != NULL
   2667   1.1     skrll 		     && ((total += tail->output_offset - prev->output_offset)
   2668   1.1     skrll 			 < stub_group_size))
   2669   1.1     skrll 		{
   2670   1.1     skrll 		  tail = prev;
   2671   1.1     skrll 		  prev = PREV_SEC (tail);
   2672   1.1     skrll 		  htab->stub_group[tail->id].link_sec = curr;
   2673   1.1     skrll 		}
   2674   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2675   1.1     skrll 	  tail = prev;
   2676   1.1     skrll 	}
   2677   1.1     skrll     }
   2678   1.1     skrll   while (list-- != htab->input_list);
   2679   1.1     skrll   free (htab->input_list);
   2680   1.1     skrll #undef PREV_SEC
   2681   1.1     skrll }
   2682   1.1     skrll 
   2683   1.1     skrll /* Read in all local syms for all input bfds, and create hash entries
   2684   1.1     skrll    for export stubs if we are building a multi-subspace shared lib.
   2685   1.1     skrll    Returns -1 on error, 1 if export stubs created, 0 otherwise.  */
   2686   1.1     skrll 
   2687   1.1     skrll static int
   2688   1.1     skrll get_local_syms (bfd *output_bfd, bfd *input_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2689   1.1     skrll {
   2690   1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_indx;
   2691   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms, **all_local_syms;
   2692   1.1     skrll   int stub_changed = 0;
   2693   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2694   1.1     skrll 
   2695   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2696   1.3  christos     return -1;
   2697   1.3  christos 
   2698   1.1     skrll   /* We want to read in symbol extension records only once.  To do this
   2699   1.1     skrll      we need to read in the local symbols in parallel and save them for
   2700   1.1     skrll      later use; so hold pointers to the local symbols in an array.  */
   2701   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt = sizeof (Elf_Internal_Sym *) * htab->bfd_count;
   2702   1.1     skrll   all_local_syms = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
   2703   1.1     skrll   htab->all_local_syms = all_local_syms;
   2704   1.1     skrll   if (all_local_syms == NULL)
   2705   1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2706   1.1     skrll 
   2707   1.1     skrll   /* Walk over all the input BFDs, swapping in local symbols.
   2708   1.1     skrll      If we are creating a shared library, create hash entries for the
   2709   1.1     skrll      export stubs.  */
   2710   1.1     skrll   for (bfd_indx = 0;
   2711   1.1     skrll        input_bfd != NULL;
   2712   1.7  christos        input_bfd = input_bfd->link.next, bfd_indx++)
   2713   1.1     skrll     {
   2714   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2715   1.1     skrll 
   2716   1.1     skrll       /* We'll need the symbol table in a second.  */
   2717   1.1     skrll       symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2718   1.1     skrll       if (symtab_hdr->sh_info == 0)
   2719   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2720   1.1     skrll 
   2721   1.1     skrll       /* We need an array of the local symbols attached to the input bfd.  */
   2722   1.1     skrll       local_syms = (Elf_Internal_Sym *) symtab_hdr->contents;
   2723   1.1     skrll       if (local_syms == NULL)
   2724   1.1     skrll 	{
   2725   1.1     skrll 	  local_syms = bfd_elf_get_elf_syms (input_bfd, symtab_hdr,
   2726   1.1     skrll 					     symtab_hdr->sh_info, 0,
   2727   1.1     skrll 					     NULL, NULL, NULL);
   2728   1.1     skrll 	  /* Cache them for elf_link_input_bfd.  */
   2729   1.1     skrll 	  symtab_hdr->contents = (unsigned char *) local_syms;
   2730   1.1     skrll 	}
   2731   1.1     skrll       if (local_syms == NULL)
   2732   1.1     skrll 	return -1;
   2733   1.1     skrll 
   2734   1.1     skrll       all_local_syms[bfd_indx] = local_syms;
   2735   1.1     skrll 
   2736   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_pic (info) && htab->multi_subspace)
   2737   1.1     skrll 	{
   2738   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_syms;
   2739   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_symend;
   2740   1.1     skrll 	  unsigned int symcount;
   2741   1.1     skrll 
   2742   1.1     skrll 	  symcount = (symtab_hdr->sh_size / sizeof (Elf32_External_Sym)
   2743   1.1     skrll 		      - symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   2744   1.1     skrll 	  eh_syms = (struct elf_link_hash_entry **) elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
   2745   1.1     skrll 	  eh_symend = (struct elf_link_hash_entry **) (eh_syms + symcount);
   2746   1.1     skrll 
   2747   1.1     skrll 	  /* Look through the global syms for functions;  We need to
   2748   1.1     skrll 	     build export stubs for all globally visible functions.  */
   2749   1.1     skrll 	  for (; eh_syms < eh_symend; eh_syms++)
   2750   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2751   1.1     skrll 	      struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2752   1.1     skrll 
   2753   1.1     skrll 	      hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (*eh_syms);
   2754   1.1     skrll 
   2755   1.1     skrll 	      while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   2756   1.1     skrll 		     || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   2757   1.1     skrll 		   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   2758   1.1     skrll 
   2759   1.1     skrll 	      /* At this point in the link, undefined syms have been
   2760   1.1     skrll 		 resolved, so we need to check that the symbol was
   2761   1.1     skrll 		 defined in this BFD.  */
   2762   1.1     skrll 	      if ((hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   2763   1.1     skrll 		   || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   2764   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.type == STT_FUNC
   2765   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.root.u.def.section->output_section != NULL
   2766   1.1     skrll 		  && (hh->eh.root.u.def.section->output_section->owner
   2767   1.1     skrll 		      == output_bfd)
   2768   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.root.u.def.section->owner == input_bfd
   2769   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.def_regular
   2770   1.1     skrll 		  && !hh->eh.forced_local
   2771   1.1     skrll 		  && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other) == STV_DEFAULT)
   2772   1.1     skrll 		{
   2773   1.1     skrll 		  asection *sec;
   2774   1.1     skrll 		  const char *stub_name;
   2775   1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
   2776   1.1     skrll 
   2777   1.1     skrll 		  sec = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   2778   1.1     skrll 		  stub_name = hh_name (hh);
   2779   1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
   2780   1.1     skrll 						      stub_name,
   2781   1.1     skrll 						      FALSE, FALSE);
   2782   1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh == NULL)
   2783   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2784   1.1     skrll 		      hsh = hppa_add_stub (stub_name, sec, htab);
   2785   1.1     skrll 		      if (!hsh)
   2786   1.1     skrll 			return -1;
   2787   1.1     skrll 
   2788   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->target_value = hh->eh.root.u.def.value;
   2789   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->target_section = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   2790   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_export;
   2791   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->hh = hh;
   2792   1.1     skrll 		      stub_changed = 1;
   2793   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2794   1.1     skrll 		  else
   2795   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2796   1.1     skrll 		      (*_bfd_error_handler) (_("%B: duplicate export stub %s"),
   2797   1.1     skrll 					     input_bfd,
   2798   1.1     skrll 					     stub_name);
   2799   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2800   1.1     skrll 		}
   2801   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2802   1.1     skrll 	}
   2803   1.1     skrll     }
   2804   1.1     skrll 
   2805   1.1     skrll   return stub_changed;
   2806   1.1     skrll }
   2807   1.1     skrll 
   2808   1.1     skrll /* Determine and set the size of the stub section for a final link.
   2809   1.1     skrll 
   2810   1.1     skrll    The basic idea here is to examine all the relocations looking for
   2811   1.1     skrll    PC-relative calls to a target that is unreachable with a "bl"
   2812   1.1     skrll    instruction.  */
   2813   1.1     skrll 
   2814   1.1     skrll bfd_boolean
   2815   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_size_stubs
   2816   1.1     skrll   (bfd *output_bfd, bfd *stub_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info,
   2817   1.1     skrll    bfd_boolean multi_subspace, bfd_signed_vma group_size,
   2818   1.1     skrll    asection * (*add_stub_section) (const char *, asection *),
   2819   1.1     skrll    void (*layout_sections_again) (void))
   2820   1.1     skrll {
   2821   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type stub_group_size;
   2822   1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean stubs_always_before_branch;
   2823   1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean stub_changed;
   2824   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2825   1.1     skrll 
   2826   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2827   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   2828   1.3  christos 
   2829   1.1     skrll   /* Stash our params away.  */
   2830   1.1     skrll   htab->stub_bfd = stub_bfd;
   2831   1.1     skrll   htab->multi_subspace = multi_subspace;
   2832   1.1     skrll   htab->add_stub_section = add_stub_section;
   2833   1.1     skrll   htab->layout_sections_again = layout_sections_again;
   2834   1.1     skrll   stubs_always_before_branch = group_size < 0;
   2835   1.1     skrll   if (group_size < 0)
   2836   1.1     skrll     stub_group_size = -group_size;
   2837   1.1     skrll   else
   2838   1.1     skrll     stub_group_size = group_size;
   2839   1.1     skrll   if (stub_group_size == 1)
   2840   1.1     skrll     {
   2841   1.1     skrll       /* Default values.  */
   2842   1.1     skrll       if (stubs_always_before_branch)
   2843   1.1     skrll 	{
   2844   1.1     skrll 	  stub_group_size = 7680000;
   2845   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_17bit_branch || htab->multi_subspace)
   2846   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 240000;
   2847   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_12bit_branch)
   2848   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 7500;
   2849   1.1     skrll 	}
   2850   1.1     skrll       else
   2851   1.1     skrll 	{
   2852   1.1     skrll 	  stub_group_size = 6971392;
   2853   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_17bit_branch || htab->multi_subspace)
   2854   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 217856;
   2855   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_12bit_branch)
   2856   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 6808;
   2857   1.1     skrll 	}
   2858   1.1     skrll     }
   2859   1.1     skrll 
   2860   1.1     skrll   group_sections (htab, stub_group_size, stubs_always_before_branch);
   2861   1.1     skrll 
   2862   1.1     skrll   switch (get_local_syms (output_bfd, info->input_bfds, info))
   2863   1.1     skrll     {
   2864   1.1     skrll     default:
   2865   1.1     skrll       if (htab->all_local_syms)
   2866   1.1     skrll 	goto error_ret_free_local;
   2867   1.1     skrll       return FALSE;
   2868   1.1     skrll 
   2869   1.1     skrll     case 0:
   2870   1.1     skrll       stub_changed = FALSE;
   2871   1.1     skrll       break;
   2872   1.1     skrll 
   2873   1.1     skrll     case 1:
   2874   1.1     skrll       stub_changed = TRUE;
   2875   1.1     skrll       break;
   2876   1.1     skrll     }
   2877   1.1     skrll 
   2878   1.1     skrll   while (1)
   2879   1.1     skrll     {
   2880   1.1     skrll       bfd *input_bfd;
   2881   1.1     skrll       unsigned int bfd_indx;
   2882   1.1     skrll       asection *stub_sec;
   2883   1.1     skrll 
   2884   1.1     skrll       for (input_bfd = info->input_bfds, bfd_indx = 0;
   2885   1.1     skrll 	   input_bfd != NULL;
   2886   1.7  christos 	   input_bfd = input_bfd->link.next, bfd_indx++)
   2887   1.1     skrll 	{
   2888   1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2889   1.1     skrll 	  asection *section;
   2890   1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms;
   2891   1.1     skrll 
   2892   1.1     skrll 	  /* We'll need the symbol table in a second.  */
   2893   1.1     skrll 	  symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2894   1.1     skrll 	  if (symtab_hdr->sh_info == 0)
   2895   1.1     skrll 	    continue;
   2896   1.1     skrll 
   2897   1.1     skrll 	  local_syms = htab->all_local_syms[bfd_indx];
   2898   1.1     skrll 
   2899   1.1     skrll 	  /* Walk over each section attached to the input bfd.  */
   2900   1.1     skrll 	  for (section = input_bfd->sections;
   2901   1.1     skrll 	       section != NULL;
   2902   1.1     skrll 	       section = section->next)
   2903   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2904   1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela *internal_relocs, *irelaend, *irela;
   2905   1.1     skrll 
   2906   1.1     skrll 	      /* If there aren't any relocs, then there's nothing more
   2907   1.1     skrll 		 to do.  */
   2908   1.1     skrll 	      if ((section->flags & SEC_RELOC) == 0
   2909   1.1     skrll 		  || section->reloc_count == 0)
   2910   1.1     skrll 		continue;
   2911   1.1     skrll 
   2912   1.1     skrll 	      /* If this section is a link-once section that will be
   2913   1.1     skrll 		 discarded, then don't create any stubs.  */
   2914   1.1     skrll 	      if (section->output_section == NULL
   2915   1.1     skrll 		  || section->output_section->owner != output_bfd)
   2916   1.1     skrll 		continue;
   2917   1.1     skrll 
   2918   1.1     skrll 	      /* Get the relocs.  */
   2919   1.1     skrll 	      internal_relocs
   2920   1.1     skrll 		= _bfd_elf_link_read_relocs (input_bfd, section, NULL, NULL,
   2921   1.1     skrll 					     info->keep_memory);
   2922   1.1     skrll 	      if (internal_relocs == NULL)
   2923   1.1     skrll 		goto error_ret_free_local;
   2924   1.1     skrll 
   2925   1.1     skrll 	      /* Now examine each relocation.  */
   2926   1.1     skrll 	      irela = internal_relocs;
   2927   1.1     skrll 	      irelaend = irela + section->reloc_count;
   2928   1.1     skrll 	      for (; irela < irelaend; irela++)
   2929   1.1     skrll 		{
   2930   1.1     skrll 		  unsigned int r_type, r_indx;
   2931   1.1     skrll 		  enum elf32_hppa_stub_type stub_type;
   2932   1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
   2933   1.1     skrll 		  asection *sym_sec;
   2934   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma sym_value;
   2935   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma destination;
   2936   1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2937   1.1     skrll 		  char *stub_name;
   2938   1.1     skrll 		  const asection *id_sec;
   2939   1.1     skrll 
   2940   1.1     skrll 		  r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (irela->r_info);
   2941   1.1     skrll 		  r_indx = ELF32_R_SYM (irela->r_info);
   2942   1.1     skrll 
   2943   1.1     skrll 		  if (r_type >= (unsigned int) R_PARISC_UNIMPLEMENTED)
   2944   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2945   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2946   1.1     skrll 		    error_ret_free_internal:
   2947   1.1     skrll 		      if (elf_section_data (section)->relocs == NULL)
   2948   1.1     skrll 			free (internal_relocs);
   2949   1.1     skrll 		      goto error_ret_free_local;
   2950   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2951   1.1     skrll 
   2952   1.1     skrll 		  /* Only look for stubs on call instructions.  */
   2953   1.1     skrll 		  if (r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F
   2954   1.1     skrll 		      && r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F
   2955   1.1     skrll 		      && r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL22F)
   2956   1.1     skrll 		    continue;
   2957   1.1     skrll 
   2958   1.1     skrll 		  /* Now determine the call target, its name, value,
   2959   1.1     skrll 		     section.  */
   2960   1.1     skrll 		  sym_sec = NULL;
   2961   1.1     skrll 		  sym_value = 0;
   2962   1.1     skrll 		  destination = 0;
   2963   1.1     skrll 		  hh = NULL;
   2964   1.1     skrll 		  if (r_indx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   2965   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2966   1.1     skrll 		      /* It's a local symbol.  */
   2967   1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
   2968   1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Shdr *hdr;
   2969   1.1     skrll 		      unsigned int shndx;
   2970   1.1     skrll 
   2971   1.1     skrll 		      sym = local_syms + r_indx;
   2972   1.1     skrll 		      if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym->st_info) != STT_SECTION)
   2973   1.1     skrll 			sym_value = sym->st_value;
   2974   1.1     skrll 		      shndx = sym->st_shndx;
   2975   1.1     skrll 		      if (shndx < elf_numsections (input_bfd))
   2976   1.1     skrll 			{
   2977   1.1     skrll 			  hdr = elf_elfsections (input_bfd)[shndx];
   2978   1.1     skrll 			  sym_sec = hdr->bfd_section;
   2979   1.1     skrll 			  destination = (sym_value + irela->r_addend
   2980   1.1     skrll 					 + sym_sec->output_offset
   2981   1.1     skrll 					 + sym_sec->output_section->vma);
   2982   1.1     skrll 			}
   2983   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2984   1.1     skrll 		  else
   2985   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2986   1.1     skrll 		      /* It's an external symbol.  */
   2987   1.1     skrll 		      int e_indx;
   2988   1.1     skrll 
   2989   1.1     skrll 		      e_indx = r_indx - symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   2990   1.1     skrll 		      hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd)[e_indx]);
   2991   1.1     skrll 
   2992   1.1     skrll 		      while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   2993   1.1     skrll 			     || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   2994   1.1     skrll 			hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   2995   1.1     skrll 
   2996   1.1     skrll 		      if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   2997   1.1     skrll 			  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   2998   1.1     skrll 			{
   2999   1.1     skrll 			  sym_sec = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   3000   1.1     skrll 			  sym_value = hh->eh.root.u.def.value;
   3001   1.1     skrll 			  if (sym_sec->output_section != NULL)
   3002   1.1     skrll 			    destination = (sym_value + irela->r_addend
   3003   1.1     skrll 					   + sym_sec->output_offset
   3004   1.1     skrll 					   + sym_sec->output_section->vma);
   3005   1.1     skrll 			}
   3006   1.1     skrll 		      else if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3007   1.1     skrll 			{
   3008   1.7  christos 			  if (! bfd_link_pic (info))
   3009   1.1     skrll 			    continue;
   3010   1.1     skrll 			}
   3011   1.1     skrll 		      else if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)
   3012   1.1     skrll 			{
   3013   1.1     skrll 			  if (! (info->unresolved_syms_in_objects == RM_IGNORE
   3014   1.1     skrll 				 && (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other)
   3015   1.1     skrll 				     == STV_DEFAULT)
   3016   1.1     skrll 				 && hh->eh.type != STT_PARISC_MILLI))
   3017   1.1     skrll 			    continue;
   3018   1.1     skrll 			}
   3019   1.1     skrll 		      else
   3020   1.1     skrll 			{
   3021   1.1     skrll 			  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   3022   1.1     skrll 			  goto error_ret_free_internal;
   3023   1.1     skrll 			}
   3024   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3025   1.1     skrll 
   3026   1.1     skrll 		  /* Determine what (if any) linker stub is needed.  */
   3027   1.1     skrll 		  stub_type = hppa_type_of_stub (section, irela, hh,
   3028   1.1     skrll 						 destination, info);
   3029   1.1     skrll 		  if (stub_type == hppa_stub_none)
   3030   1.1     skrll 		    continue;
   3031   1.1     skrll 
   3032   1.1     skrll 		  /* Support for grouping stub sections.  */
   3033   1.1     skrll 		  id_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].link_sec;
   3034   1.1     skrll 
   3035   1.1     skrll 		  /* Get the name of this stub.  */
   3036   1.1     skrll 		  stub_name = hppa_stub_name (id_sec, sym_sec, hh, irela);
   3037   1.1     skrll 		  if (!stub_name)
   3038   1.1     skrll 		    goto error_ret_free_internal;
   3039   1.1     skrll 
   3040   1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
   3041   1.1     skrll 						      stub_name,
   3042   1.1     skrll 						      FALSE, FALSE);
   3043   1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh != NULL)
   3044   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3045   1.1     skrll 		      /* The proper stub has already been created.  */
   3046   1.1     skrll 		      free (stub_name);
   3047   1.1     skrll 		      continue;
   3048   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3049   1.1     skrll 
   3050   1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_add_stub (stub_name, section, htab);
   3051   1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh == NULL)
   3052   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3053   1.1     skrll 		      free (stub_name);
   3054   1.1     skrll 		      goto error_ret_free_internal;
   3055   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3056   1.1     skrll 
   3057   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->target_value = sym_value;
   3058   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->target_section = sym_sec;
   3059   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->stub_type = stub_type;
   3060   1.7  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   3061   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3062   1.1     skrll 		      if (stub_type == hppa_stub_import)
   3063   1.1     skrll 			hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_import_shared;
   3064   1.1     skrll 		      else if (stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch)
   3065   1.1     skrll 			hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_long_branch_shared;
   3066   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3067   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->hh = hh;
   3068   1.1     skrll 		  stub_changed = TRUE;
   3069   1.1     skrll 		}
   3070   1.1     skrll 
   3071   1.1     skrll 	      /* We're done with the internal relocs, free them.  */
   3072   1.1     skrll 	      if (elf_section_data (section)->relocs == NULL)
   3073   1.1     skrll 		free (internal_relocs);
   3074   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3075   1.1     skrll 	}
   3076   1.1     skrll 
   3077   1.1     skrll       if (!stub_changed)
   3078   1.1     skrll 	break;
   3079   1.1     skrll 
   3080   1.1     skrll       /* OK, we've added some stubs.  Find out the new size of the
   3081   1.1     skrll 	 stub sections.  */
   3082   1.1     skrll       for (stub_sec = htab->stub_bfd->sections;
   3083   1.1     skrll 	   stub_sec != NULL;
   3084   1.1     skrll 	   stub_sec = stub_sec->next)
   3085  1.10  christos 	if ((stub_sec->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
   3086  1.10  christos 	  stub_sec->size = 0;
   3087   1.1     skrll 
   3088   1.1     skrll       bfd_hash_traverse (&htab->bstab, hppa_size_one_stub, htab);
   3089   1.1     skrll 
   3090   1.1     skrll       /* Ask the linker to do its stuff.  */
   3091   1.1     skrll       (*htab->layout_sections_again) ();
   3092   1.1     skrll       stub_changed = FALSE;
   3093   1.1     skrll     }
   3094   1.1     skrll 
   3095   1.1     skrll   free (htab->all_local_syms);
   3096   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3097   1.1     skrll 
   3098   1.1     skrll  error_ret_free_local:
   3099   1.1     skrll   free (htab->all_local_syms);
   3100   1.1     skrll   return FALSE;
   3101   1.1     skrll }
   3102   1.1     skrll 
   3103   1.1     skrll /* For a final link, this function is called after we have sized the
   3104   1.1     skrll    stubs to provide a value for __gp.  */
   3105   1.1     skrll 
   3106   1.1     skrll bfd_boolean
   3107   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_set_gp (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3108   1.1     skrll {
   3109   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_hash_entry *h;
   3110   1.1     skrll   asection *sec = NULL;
   3111   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma gp_val = 0;
   3112   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3113   1.1     skrll 
   3114   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   3115   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3116   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   3117   1.3  christos 
   3118   1.1     skrll   h = bfd_link_hash_lookup (&htab->etab.root, "$global$", FALSE, FALSE, FALSE);
   3119   1.1     skrll 
   3120   1.1     skrll   if (h != NULL
   3121   1.1     skrll       && (h->type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   3122   1.1     skrll 	  || h->type == bfd_link_hash_defweak))
   3123   1.1     skrll     {
   3124   1.1     skrll       gp_val = h->u.def.value;
   3125   1.1     skrll       sec = h->u.def.section;
   3126   1.1     skrll     }
   3127   1.1     skrll   else
   3128   1.1     skrll     {
   3129   1.1     skrll       asection *splt = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".plt");
   3130   1.1     skrll       asection *sgot = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".got");
   3131   1.1     skrll 
   3132   1.1     skrll       /* Choose to point our LTP at, in this order, one of .plt, .got,
   3133   1.1     skrll 	 or .data, if these sections exist.  In the case of choosing
   3134   1.1     skrll 	 .plt try to make the LTP ideal for addressing anywhere in the
   3135   1.1     skrll 	 .plt or .got with a 14 bit signed offset.  Typically, the end
   3136   1.1     skrll 	 of the .plt is the start of the .got, so choose .plt + 0x2000
   3137   1.1     skrll 	 if either the .plt or .got is larger than 0x2000.  If both
   3138   1.1     skrll 	 the .plt and .got are smaller than 0x2000, choose the end of
   3139   1.1     skrll 	 the .plt section.  */
   3140   1.1     skrll       sec = strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") == 0
   3141   1.1     skrll 	  ? NULL : splt;
   3142   1.1     skrll       if (sec != NULL)
   3143   1.1     skrll 	{
   3144   1.1     skrll 	  gp_val = sec->size;
   3145   1.1     skrll 	  if (gp_val > 0x2000 || (sgot && sgot->size > 0x2000))
   3146   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3147   1.1     skrll 	      gp_val = 0x2000;
   3148   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3149   1.1     skrll 	}
   3150   1.1     skrll       else
   3151   1.1     skrll 	{
   3152   1.1     skrll 	  sec = sgot;
   3153   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec != NULL)
   3154   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3155   1.1     skrll 	      if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") != 0)
   3156   1.1     skrll 		{
   3157   1.1     skrll 	          /* We know we don't have a .plt.  If .got is large,
   3158   1.1     skrll 		     offset our LTP.  */
   3159   1.1     skrll 	          if (sec->size > 0x2000)
   3160   1.1     skrll 		    gp_val = 0x2000;
   3161   1.1     skrll 		}
   3162   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3163   1.1     skrll 	  else
   3164   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3165   1.1     skrll 	      /* No .plt or .got.  Who cares what the LTP is?  */
   3166   1.1     skrll 	      sec = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".data");
   3167   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3168   1.1     skrll 	}
   3169   1.1     skrll 
   3170   1.1     skrll       if (h != NULL)
   3171   1.1     skrll 	{
   3172   1.1     skrll 	  h->type = bfd_link_hash_defined;
   3173   1.1     skrll 	  h->u.def.value = gp_val;
   3174   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec != NULL)
   3175   1.1     skrll 	    h->u.def.section = sec;
   3176   1.1     skrll 	  else
   3177   1.1     skrll 	    h->u.def.section = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
   3178   1.1     skrll 	}
   3179   1.1     skrll     }
   3180   1.1     skrll 
   3181   1.1     skrll   if (sec != NULL && sec->output_section != NULL)
   3182   1.1     skrll     gp_val += sec->output_section->vma + sec->output_offset;
   3183   1.1     skrll 
   3184   1.1     skrll   elf_gp (abfd) = gp_val;
   3185   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3186   1.1     skrll }
   3187   1.1     skrll 
   3188   1.1     skrll /* Build all the stubs associated with the current output file.  The
   3189   1.1     skrll    stubs are kept in a hash table attached to the main linker hash
   3190   1.1     skrll    table.  We also set up the .plt entries for statically linked PIC
   3191   1.1     skrll    functions here.  This function is called via hppaelf_finish in the
   3192   1.1     skrll    linker.  */
   3193   1.1     skrll 
   3194   1.1     skrll bfd_boolean
   3195   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_build_stubs (struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3196   1.1     skrll {
   3197   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
   3198   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_table *table;
   3199   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3200   1.1     skrll 
   3201   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   3202   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3203   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   3204   1.1     skrll 
   3205   1.1     skrll   for (stub_sec = htab->stub_bfd->sections;
   3206   1.1     skrll        stub_sec != NULL;
   3207   1.1     skrll        stub_sec = stub_sec->next)
   3208  1.10  christos     if ((stub_sec->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0
   3209  1.10  christos 	&& stub_sec->size != 0)
   3210  1.10  christos       {
   3211  1.10  christos 	/* Allocate memory to hold the linker stubs.  */
   3212  1.10  christos 	stub_sec->contents = bfd_zalloc (htab->stub_bfd, stub_sec->size);
   3213  1.10  christos 	if (stub_sec->contents == NULL)
   3214  1.10  christos 	  return FALSE;
   3215  1.10  christos 	stub_sec->size = 0;
   3216  1.10  christos       }
   3217   1.1     skrll 
   3218   1.1     skrll   /* Build the stubs as directed by the stub hash table.  */
   3219   1.1     skrll   table = &htab->bstab;
   3220   1.1     skrll   bfd_hash_traverse (table, hppa_build_one_stub, info);
   3221   1.1     skrll 
   3222   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3223   1.1     skrll }
   3224   1.1     skrll 
   3225   1.1     skrll /* Return the base vma address which should be subtracted from the real
   3226   1.7  christos    address when resolving a dtpoff relocation.
   3227   1.1     skrll    This is PT_TLS segment p_vaddr.  */
   3228   1.1     skrll 
   3229   1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   3230   1.1     skrll dtpoff_base (struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3231   1.1     skrll {
   3232   1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   3233   1.1     skrll   if (elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec == NULL)
   3234   1.1     skrll     return 0;
   3235   1.1     skrll   return elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec->vma;
   3236   1.1     skrll }
   3237   1.1     skrll 
   3238   1.1     skrll /* Return the relocation value for R_PARISC_TLS_TPOFF*..  */
   3239   1.1     skrll 
   3240   1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   3241   1.1     skrll tpoff (struct bfd_link_info *info, bfd_vma address)
   3242   1.1     skrll {
   3243   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table *htab = elf_hash_table (info);
   3244   1.1     skrll 
   3245   1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   3246   1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_sec == NULL)
   3247   1.1     skrll     return 0;
   3248   1.7  christos   /* hppa TLS ABI is variant I and static TLS block start just after
   3249   1.1     skrll      tcbhead structure which has 2 pointer fields.  */
   3250   1.7  christos   return (address - htab->tls_sec->vma
   3251   1.1     skrll 	  + align_power ((bfd_vma) 8, htab->tls_sec->alignment_power));
   3252   1.1     skrll }
   3253   1.1     skrll 
   3254   1.1     skrll /* Perform a final link.  */
   3255   1.1     skrll 
   3256   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   3257   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_final_link (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3258   1.1     skrll {
   3259   1.9  christos   struct stat buf;
   3260   1.9  christos 
   3261   1.1     skrll   /* Invoke the regular ELF linker to do all the work.  */
   3262   1.1     skrll   if (!bfd_elf_final_link (abfd, info))
   3263   1.1     skrll     return FALSE;
   3264   1.1     skrll 
   3265   1.1     skrll   /* If we're producing a final executable, sort the contents of the
   3266   1.1     skrll      unwind section.  */
   3267   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   3268   1.3  christos     return TRUE;
   3269   1.3  christos 
   3270   1.9  christos   /* Do not attempt to sort non-regular files.  This is here
   3271   1.9  christos      especially for configure scripts and kernel builds which run
   3272   1.9  christos      tests with "ld [...] -o /dev/null".  */
   3273   1.9  christos   if (stat (abfd->filename, &buf) != 0
   3274   1.9  christos       || !S_ISREG(buf.st_mode))
   3275   1.9  christos     return TRUE;
   3276   1.9  christos 
   3277   1.1     skrll   return elf_hppa_sort_unwind (abfd);
   3278   1.1     skrll }
   3279   1.1     skrll 
   3280   1.1     skrll /* Record the lowest address for the data and text segments.  */
   3281   1.1     skrll 
   3282   1.1     skrll static void
   3283   1.1     skrll hppa_record_segment_addr (bfd *abfd, asection *section, void *data)
   3284   1.1     skrll {
   3285   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3286   1.1     skrll 
   3287   1.1     skrll   htab = (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table*) data;
   3288   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3289   1.3  christos     return;
   3290   1.1     skrll 
   3291   1.1     skrll   if ((section->flags & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD)) == (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD))
   3292   1.1     skrll     {
   3293   1.1     skrll       bfd_vma value;
   3294   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Phdr *p;
   3295   1.1     skrll 
   3296   1.1     skrll       p = _bfd_elf_find_segment_containing_section (abfd, section->output_section);
   3297   1.1     skrll       BFD_ASSERT (p != NULL);
   3298   1.1     skrll       value = p->p_vaddr;
   3299   1.1     skrll 
   3300   1.1     skrll       if ((section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   3301   1.1     skrll 	{
   3302   1.1     skrll 	  if (value < htab->text_segment_base)
   3303   1.1     skrll 	    htab->text_segment_base = value;
   3304   1.1     skrll 	}
   3305   1.1     skrll       else
   3306   1.1     skrll 	{
   3307   1.1     skrll 	  if (value < htab->data_segment_base)
   3308   1.1     skrll 	    htab->data_segment_base = value;
   3309   1.1     skrll 	}
   3310   1.1     skrll     }
   3311   1.1     skrll }
   3312   1.1     skrll 
   3313   1.1     skrll /* Perform a relocation as part of a final link.  */
   3314   1.1     skrll 
   3315   1.1     skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type
   3316   1.1     skrll final_link_relocate (asection *input_section,
   3317   1.1     skrll 		     bfd_byte *contents,
   3318   1.1     skrll 		     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
   3319   1.1     skrll 		     bfd_vma value,
   3320   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab,
   3321   1.1     skrll 		     asection *sym_sec,
   3322   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
   3323   1.1     skrll 		     struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3324   1.1     skrll {
   3325   1.1     skrll   int insn;
   3326   1.1     skrll   unsigned int r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   3327   1.1     skrll   unsigned int orig_r_type = r_type;
   3328   1.1     skrll   reloc_howto_type *howto = elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type;
   3329   1.1     skrll   int r_format = howto->bitsize;
   3330   1.1     skrll   enum hppa_reloc_field_selector_type_alt r_field;
   3331   1.1     skrll   bfd *input_bfd = input_section->owner;
   3332   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma offset = rela->r_offset;
   3333   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma max_branch_offset = 0;
   3334   1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *hit_data = contents + offset;
   3335   1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma addend = rela->r_addend;
   3336   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma location;
   3337   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh = NULL;
   3338   1.7  christos   int val;
   3339   1.1     skrll 
   3340   1.1     skrll   if (r_type == R_PARISC_NONE)
   3341   1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_ok;
   3342   1.1     skrll 
   3343   1.1     skrll   insn = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, hit_data);
   3344   1.1     skrll 
   3345   1.1     skrll   /* Find out where we are and where we're going.  */
   3346   1.1     skrll   location = (offset +
   3347   1.1     skrll 	      input_section->output_offset +
   3348   1.1     skrll 	      input_section->output_section->vma);
   3349   1.1     skrll 
   3350   1.1     skrll   /* If we are not building a shared library, convert DLTIND relocs to
   3351   1.1     skrll      DPREL relocs.  */
   3352   1.7  christos   if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
   3353   1.1     skrll     {
   3354   1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   3355   1.1     skrll 	{
   3356   1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3357   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3358   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3359   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3360   1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL21L;
   3361   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3362   1.1     skrll 
   3363   1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3364   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3365   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3366   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3367   1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL14R;
   3368   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3369   1.1     skrll 
   3370   1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3371   1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL14F;
   3372   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3373   1.1     skrll 	}
   3374   1.1     skrll     }
   3375   1.1     skrll 
   3376   1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3377   1.1     skrll     {
   3378   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3379   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3380   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3381   1.1     skrll       /* If this call should go via the plt, find the import stub in
   3382   1.1     skrll 	 the stub hash.  */
   3383   1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL
   3384   1.1     skrll 	  || sym_sec->output_section == NULL
   3385   1.1     skrll 	  || (hh != NULL
   3386   1.1     skrll 	      && hh->eh.plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   3387   1.1     skrll 	      && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   3388   1.1     skrll 	      && !hh->plabel
   3389   1.7  christos 	      && (bfd_link_pic (info)
   3390   1.1     skrll 		  || !hh->eh.def_regular
   3391   1.1     skrll 		  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)))
   3392   1.1     skrll 	{
   3393   1.1     skrll 	  hsh = hppa_get_stub_entry (input_section, sym_sec,
   3394   1.1     skrll 					    hh, rela, htab);
   3395   1.1     skrll 	  if (hsh != NULL)
   3396   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3397   1.1     skrll 	      value = (hsh->stub_offset
   3398   1.1     skrll 		       + hsh->stub_sec->output_offset
   3399   1.1     skrll 		       + hsh->stub_sec->output_section->vma);
   3400   1.1     skrll 	      addend = 0;
   3401   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3402   1.1     skrll 	  else if (sym_sec == NULL && hh != NULL
   3403   1.1     skrll 		   && hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3404   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3405   1.1     skrll 	      /* It's OK if undefined weak.  Calls to undefined weak
   3406   1.1     skrll 		 symbols behave as if the "called" function
   3407   1.1     skrll 		 immediately returns.  We can thus call to a weak
   3408   1.1     skrll 		 function without first checking whether the function
   3409   1.1     skrll 		 is defined.  */
   3410   1.1     skrll 	      value = location;
   3411   1.1     skrll 	      addend = 8;
   3412   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3413   1.1     skrll 	  else
   3414   1.1     skrll 	    return bfd_reloc_undefined;
   3415   1.1     skrll 	}
   3416   1.1     skrll       /* Fall thru.  */
   3417   1.1     skrll 
   3418   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL21L:
   3419   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3420   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3421   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   3422   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14F:
   3423   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   3424   1.1     skrll       /* Make it a pc relative offset.  */
   3425   1.1     skrll       value -= location;
   3426   1.1     skrll       addend -= 8;
   3427   1.1     skrll       break;
   3428   1.1     skrll 
   3429   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3430   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3431   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3432   1.1     skrll       /* Convert instructions that use the linkage table pointer (r19) to
   3433   1.1     skrll 	 instructions that use the global data pointer (dp).  This is the
   3434   1.1     skrll 	 most efficient way of using PIC code in an incomplete executable,
   3435   1.1     skrll 	 but the user must follow the standard runtime conventions for
   3436   1.1     skrll 	 accessing data for this to work.  */
   3437   1.5     skrll       if (orig_r_type != r_type)
   3438   1.1     skrll 	{
   3439   1.5     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_PARISC_DPREL21L)
   3440   1.5     skrll 	    {
   3441   1.5     skrll 	      /* GCC sometimes uses a register other than r19 for the
   3442   1.5     skrll 		 operation, so we must convert any addil instruction
   3443   1.5     skrll 		 that uses this relocation.  */
   3444   1.5     skrll 	      if ((insn & 0xfc000000) == ((int) OP_ADDIL << 26))
   3445   1.5     skrll 		insn = ADDIL_DP;
   3446   1.5     skrll 	      else
   3447   1.5     skrll 		/* We must have a ldil instruction.  It's too hard to find
   3448   1.5     skrll 		   and convert the associated add instruction, so issue an
   3449   1.5     skrll 		   error.  */
   3450   1.5     skrll 		(*_bfd_error_handler)
   3451   1.5     skrll 		  (_("%B(%A+0x%lx): %s fixup for insn 0x%x is not supported in a non-shared link"),
   3452   1.5     skrll 		   input_bfd,
   3453   1.5     skrll 		   input_section,
   3454   1.5     skrll 		   (long) offset,
   3455   1.5     skrll 		   howto->name,
   3456   1.5     skrll 		   insn);
   3457   1.5     skrll 	    }
   3458   1.5     skrll 	  else if (r_type == R_PARISC_DPREL14F)
   3459   1.5     skrll 	    {
   3460   1.5     skrll 	      /* This must be a format 1 load/store.  Change the base
   3461   1.5     skrll 		 register to dp.  */
   3462   1.5     skrll 	      insn = (insn & 0xfc1ffff) | (27 << 21);
   3463   1.5     skrll 	    }
   3464   1.5     skrll 	}
   3465   1.5     skrll 
   3466   1.5     skrll       /* For all the DP relative relocations, we need to examine the symbol's
   3467   1.5     skrll 	 section.  If it has no section or if it's a code section, then
   3468   1.5     skrll 	 "data pointer relative" makes no sense.  In that case we don't
   3469   1.5     skrll 	 adjust the "value", and for 21 bit addil instructions, we change the
   3470   1.5     skrll 	 source addend register from %dp to %r0.  This situation commonly
   3471   1.5     skrll 	 arises for undefined weak symbols and when a variable's "constness"
   3472   1.5     skrll 	 is declared differently from the way the variable is defined.  For
   3473   1.5     skrll 	 instance: "extern int foo" with foo defined as "const int foo".  */
   3474   1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL || (sym_sec->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   3475   1.1     skrll 	{
   3476   1.1     skrll 	  if ((insn & ((0x3f << 26) | (0x1f << 21)))
   3477   1.1     skrll 	      == (((int) OP_ADDIL << 26) | (27 << 21)))
   3478   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3479   1.1     skrll 	      insn &= ~ (0x1f << 21);
   3480   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3481   1.1     skrll 	  /* Now try to make things easy for the dynamic linker.  */
   3482   1.1     skrll 
   3483   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3484   1.1     skrll 	}
   3485   1.1     skrll       /* Fall thru.  */
   3486   1.1     skrll 
   3487   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3488   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3489   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3490   1.4     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3491   1.5     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3492   1.5     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3493   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3494   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3495   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3496   1.1     skrll       value -= elf_gp (input_section->output_section->owner);
   3497   1.1     skrll       break;
   3498   1.1     skrll 
   3499   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3500   1.1     skrll       if ((sym_sec->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   3501   1.1     skrll 	value -= htab->text_segment_base;
   3502   1.1     skrll       else
   3503   1.1     skrll 	value -= htab->data_segment_base;
   3504   1.1     skrll       break;
   3505   1.1     skrll 
   3506   1.1     skrll     default:
   3507   1.1     skrll       break;
   3508   1.1     skrll     }
   3509   1.1     skrll 
   3510   1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3511   1.1     skrll     {
   3512   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR32:
   3513   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR14F:
   3514   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3515   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3516   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14F:
   3517   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   3518   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3519   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   3520   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3521   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGBASE:
   3522   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3523   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32:
   3524   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32:
   3525   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32:
   3526   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_fsel;
   3527   1.1     skrll       break;
   3528   1.1     skrll 
   3529   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3530   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL21L:
   3531   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   3532   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_lsel;
   3533   1.1     skrll       break;
   3534   1.1     skrll 
   3535   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
   3536   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3537   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3538   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3539   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L:
   3540   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3541   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L:
   3542   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_lrsel;
   3543   1.1     skrll       break;
   3544   1.1     skrll 
   3545   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3546   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   3547   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
   3548   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3549   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_rsel;
   3550   1.1     skrll       break;
   3551   1.1     skrll 
   3552   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3553   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   3554   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3555   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3556   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3557   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO14R:
   3558   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3559   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LE14R:
   3560   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_rrsel;
   3561   1.1     skrll       break;
   3562   1.1     skrll 
   3563   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3564   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3565   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3566   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_fsel;
   3567   1.1     skrll 
   3568   1.1     skrll       if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F)
   3569   1.1     skrll 	{
   3570   1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (17-1)) << 2;
   3571   1.1     skrll 	}
   3572   1.1     skrll       else if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F)
   3573   1.1     skrll 	{
   3574   1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (12-1)) << 2;
   3575   1.1     skrll 	}
   3576   1.1     skrll       else
   3577   1.1     skrll 	{
   3578   1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (22-1)) << 2;
   3579   1.1     skrll 	}
   3580   1.1     skrll 
   3581   1.1     skrll       /* sym_sec is NULL on undefined weak syms or when shared on
   3582   1.1     skrll 	 undefined syms.  We've already checked for a stub for the
   3583   1.1     skrll 	 shared undefined case.  */
   3584   1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL)
   3585   1.1     skrll 	break;
   3586   1.1     skrll 
   3587   1.1     skrll       /* If the branch is out of reach, then redirect the
   3588   1.1     skrll 	 call to the local stub for this function.  */
   3589   1.1     skrll       if (value + addend + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
   3590   1.1     skrll 	{
   3591   1.1     skrll 	  hsh = hppa_get_stub_entry (input_section, sym_sec,
   3592   1.1     skrll 					    hh, rela, htab);
   3593   1.1     skrll 	  if (hsh == NULL)
   3594   1.1     skrll 	    return bfd_reloc_undefined;
   3595   1.1     skrll 
   3596   1.1     skrll 	  /* Munge up the value and addend so that we call the stub
   3597   1.1     skrll 	     rather than the procedure directly.  */
   3598   1.1     skrll 	  value = (hsh->stub_offset
   3599   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->stub_sec->output_offset
   3600   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->stub_sec->output_section->vma
   3601   1.1     skrll 		   - location);
   3602   1.1     skrll 	  addend = -8;
   3603   1.1     skrll 	}
   3604   1.1     skrll       break;
   3605   1.1     skrll 
   3606   1.1     skrll     /* Something we don't know how to handle.  */
   3607   1.1     skrll     default:
   3608   1.1     skrll       return bfd_reloc_notsupported;
   3609   1.1     skrll     }
   3610   1.1     skrll 
   3611   1.1     skrll   /* Make sure we can reach the stub.  */
   3612   1.1     skrll   if (max_branch_offset != 0
   3613   1.1     skrll       && value + addend + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
   3614   1.1     skrll     {
   3615   1.1     skrll       (*_bfd_error_handler)
   3616   1.1     skrll 	(_("%B(%A+0x%lx): cannot reach %s, recompile with -ffunction-sections"),
   3617   1.1     skrll 	 input_bfd,
   3618   1.1     skrll 	 input_section,
   3619   1.3  christos 	 (long) offset,
   3620   1.1     skrll 	 hsh->bh_root.string);
   3621   1.1     skrll       bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   3622   1.1     skrll       return bfd_reloc_notsupported;
   3623   1.1     skrll     }
   3624   1.1     skrll 
   3625   1.1     skrll   val = hppa_field_adjust (value, addend, r_field);
   3626   1.1     skrll 
   3627   1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3628   1.1     skrll     {
   3629   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3630   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3631   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3632   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3633   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3634   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3635   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3636   1.1     skrll       /* This is a branch.  Divide the offset by four.
   3637   1.1     skrll 	 Note that we need to decide whether it's a branch or
   3638   1.1     skrll 	 otherwise by inspecting the reloc.  Inspecting insn won't
   3639   1.1     skrll 	 work as insn might be from a .word directive.  */
   3640   1.1     skrll       val >>= 2;
   3641   1.1     skrll       break;
   3642   1.1     skrll 
   3643   1.1     skrll     default:
   3644   1.1     skrll       break;
   3645   1.1     skrll     }
   3646   1.1     skrll 
   3647   1.1     skrll   insn = hppa_rebuild_insn (insn, val, r_format);
   3648   1.1     skrll 
   3649   1.1     skrll   /* Update the instruction word.  */
   3650   1.1     skrll   bfd_put_32 (input_bfd, (bfd_vma) insn, hit_data);
   3651   1.1     skrll   return bfd_reloc_ok;
   3652   1.1     skrll }
   3653   1.1     skrll 
   3654   1.1     skrll /* Relocate an HPPA ELF section.  */
   3655   1.1     skrll 
   3656   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   3657   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_relocate_section (bfd *output_bfd,
   3658   1.1     skrll 			     struct bfd_link_info *info,
   3659   1.1     skrll 			     bfd *input_bfd,
   3660   1.1     skrll 			     asection *input_section,
   3661   1.1     skrll 			     bfd_byte *contents,
   3662   1.1     skrll 			     Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs,
   3663   1.1     skrll 			     Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms,
   3664   1.1     skrll 			     asection **local_sections)
   3665   1.1     skrll {
   3666   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma *local_got_offsets;
   3667   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3668   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   3669   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *rela;
   3670   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *relend;
   3671   1.1     skrll 
   3672   1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   3673   1.1     skrll 
   3674   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   3675   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3676   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   3677   1.3  christos 
   3678   1.1     skrll   local_got_offsets = elf_local_got_offsets (input_bfd);
   3679   1.1     skrll 
   3680   1.1     skrll   rela = relocs;
   3681   1.1     skrll   relend = relocs + input_section->reloc_count;
   3682   1.1     skrll   for (; rela < relend; rela++)
   3683   1.1     skrll     {
   3684   1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
   3685   1.1     skrll       reloc_howto_type *howto;
   3686   1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_symndx;
   3687   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   3688   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
   3689   1.1     skrll       asection *sym_sec;
   3690   1.1     skrll       bfd_vma relocation;
   3691   1.1     skrll       bfd_reloc_status_type rstatus;
   3692   1.1     skrll       const char *sym_name;
   3693   1.1     skrll       bfd_boolean plabel;
   3694   1.1     skrll       bfd_boolean warned_undef;
   3695   1.1     skrll 
   3696   1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   3697   1.1     skrll       if (r_type >= (unsigned int) R_PARISC_UNIMPLEMENTED)
   3698   1.1     skrll 	{
   3699   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   3700   1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
   3701   1.1     skrll 	}
   3702   1.1     skrll       if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY
   3703   1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT)
   3704   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   3705   1.1     skrll 
   3706   1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   3707   1.1     skrll       hh = NULL;
   3708   1.1     skrll       sym = NULL;
   3709   1.1     skrll       sym_sec = NULL;
   3710   1.1     skrll       warned_undef = FALSE;
   3711   1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   3712   1.1     skrll 	{
   3713   1.1     skrll 	  /* This is a local symbol, h defaults to NULL.  */
   3714   1.1     skrll 	  sym = local_syms + r_symndx;
   3715   1.1     skrll 	  sym_sec = local_sections[r_symndx];
   3716   1.1     skrll 	  relocation = _bfd_elf_rela_local_sym (output_bfd, sym, &sym_sec, rela);
   3717   1.1     skrll 	}
   3718   1.1     skrll       else
   3719   1.1     skrll 	{
   3720   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh;
   3721   1.7  christos 	  bfd_boolean unresolved_reloc, ignored;
   3722   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
   3723   1.1     skrll 
   3724   1.1     skrll 	  RELOC_FOR_GLOBAL_SYMBOL (info, input_bfd, input_section, rela,
   3725   1.1     skrll 				   r_symndx, symtab_hdr, sym_hashes,
   3726   1.1     skrll 				   eh, sym_sec, relocation,
   3727   1.7  christos 				   unresolved_reloc, warned_undef,
   3728   1.7  christos 				   ignored);
   3729   1.1     skrll 
   3730   1.7  christos 	  if (!bfd_link_relocatable (info)
   3731   1.1     skrll 	      && relocation == 0
   3732   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defined
   3733   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak
   3734   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3735   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3736   1.1     skrll 	      if (info->unresolved_syms_in_objects == RM_IGNORE
   3737   1.1     skrll 		  && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (eh->other) == STV_DEFAULT
   3738   1.1     skrll 		  && eh->type == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   3739   1.1     skrll 		{
   3740  1.10  christos 		  (*info->callbacks->undefined_symbol)
   3741  1.10  christos 		    (info, eh_name (eh), input_bfd,
   3742  1.10  christos 		     input_section, rela->r_offset, FALSE);
   3743   1.1     skrll 		  warned_undef = TRUE;
   3744   1.1     skrll 		}
   3745   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3746   1.1     skrll 	  hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   3747   1.1     skrll 	}
   3748   1.1     skrll 
   3749   1.6  christos       if (sym_sec != NULL && discarded_section (sym_sec))
   3750   1.3  christos 	RELOC_AGAINST_DISCARDED_SECTION (info, input_bfd, input_section,
   3751   1.6  christos 					 rela, 1, relend,
   3752   1.6  christos 					 elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type, 0,
   3753   1.3  christos 					 contents);
   3754   1.1     skrll 
   3755   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   3756   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   3757   1.1     skrll 
   3758   1.1     skrll       /* Do any required modifications to the relocation value, and
   3759   1.1     skrll 	 determine what types of dynamic info we need to output, if
   3760   1.1     skrll 	 any.  */
   3761   1.1     skrll       plabel = 0;
   3762   1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   3763   1.1     skrll 	{
   3764   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3765   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3766   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3767   1.1     skrll 	  {
   3768   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   3769   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_boolean do_got = 0;
   3770   1.1     skrll 
   3771   1.1     skrll 	    /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the
   3772   1.1     skrll 	       global offset table.  */
   3773   1.1     skrll 	    if (hh != NULL)
   3774   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3775   1.1     skrll 		bfd_boolean dyn;
   3776   1.1     skrll 
   3777   1.1     skrll 		off = hh->eh.got.offset;
   3778   1.1     skrll 		dyn = htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created;
   3779   1.7  christos 		if (! WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn,
   3780   1.7  christos 						       bfd_link_pic (info),
   3781   1.1     skrll 						       &hh->eh))
   3782   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3783   1.1     skrll 		    /* If we aren't going to call finish_dynamic_symbol,
   3784   1.1     skrll 		       then we need to handle initialisation of the .got
   3785   1.1     skrll 		       entry and create needed relocs here.  Since the
   3786   1.1     skrll 		       offset must always be a multiple of 4, we use the
   3787   1.1     skrll 		       least significant bit to record whether we have
   3788   1.1     skrll 		       initialised it already.  */
   3789   1.1     skrll 		    if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3790   1.1     skrll 		      off &= ~1;
   3791   1.1     skrll 		    else
   3792   1.1     skrll 		      {
   3793   1.1     skrll 			hh->eh.got.offset |= 1;
   3794   1.1     skrll 			do_got = 1;
   3795   1.1     skrll 		      }
   3796   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3797   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3798   1.1     skrll 	    else
   3799   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3800   1.1     skrll 		/* Local symbol case.  */
   3801   1.1     skrll 		if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   3802   1.1     skrll 		  abort ();
   3803   1.1     skrll 
   3804   1.1     skrll 		off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   3805   1.1     skrll 
   3806   1.1     skrll 		/* The offset must always be a multiple of 4.  We use
   3807   1.1     skrll 		   the least significant bit to record whether we have
   3808   1.1     skrll 		   already generated the necessary reloc.  */
   3809   1.1     skrll 		if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3810   1.1     skrll 		  off &= ~1;
   3811   1.1     skrll 		else
   3812   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3813   1.1     skrll 		    local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   3814   1.1     skrll 		    do_got = 1;
   3815   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3816   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3817   1.1     skrll 
   3818   1.1     skrll 	    if (do_got)
   3819   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3820   1.7  christos 		if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   3821   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3822   1.1     skrll 		    /* Output a dynamic relocation for this GOT entry.
   3823   1.1     skrll 		       In this case it is relative to the base of the
   3824   1.1     skrll 		       object because the symbol index is zero.  */
   3825   1.1     skrll 		    Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3826   1.1     skrll 		    bfd_byte *loc;
   3827   1.1     skrll 		    asection *sec = htab->srelgot;
   3828   1.1     skrll 
   3829   1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_offset = (off
   3830   1.1     skrll 				       + htab->sgot->output_offset
   3831   1.1     skrll 				       + htab->sgot->output_section->vma);
   3832   1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   3833   1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_addend = relocation;
   3834   1.1     skrll 		    loc = sec->contents;
   3835   1.1     skrll 		    loc += sec->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3836   1.1     skrll 		    bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3837   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3838   1.1     skrll 		else
   3839   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relocation,
   3840   1.1     skrll 			      htab->sgot->contents + off);
   3841   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3842   1.1     skrll 
   3843   1.1     skrll 	    if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   3844   1.1     skrll 	      abort ();
   3845   1.1     skrll 
   3846   1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   3847   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   3848   1.1     skrll 			  + htab->sgot->output_offset
   3849   1.1     skrll 			  + htab->sgot->output_section->vma);
   3850   1.1     skrll 	  }
   3851   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3852   1.1     skrll 
   3853   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3854   1.1     skrll 	  /* If this is the first SEGREL relocation, then initialize
   3855   1.1     skrll 	     the segment base values.  */
   3856   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->text_segment_base == (bfd_vma) -1)
   3857   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_map_over_sections (output_bfd, hppa_record_segment_addr, htab);
   3858   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3859   1.1     skrll 
   3860   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
   3861   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   3862   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   3863   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   3864   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3865   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_vma off;
   3866   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_boolean do_plt = 0;
   3867   1.1     skrll 	      /* If we have a global symbol with a PLT slot, then
   3868   1.1     skrll 		 redirect this relocation to it.  */
   3869   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   3870   1.1     skrll 		{
   3871   1.1     skrll 		  off = hh->eh.plt.offset;
   3872   1.7  christos 		  if (! WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1,
   3873   1.7  christos 							 bfd_link_pic (info),
   3874   1.1     skrll 							 &hh->eh))
   3875   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3876   1.1     skrll 		      /* In a non-shared link, adjust_dynamic_symbols
   3877   1.1     skrll 			 isn't called for symbols forced local.  We
   3878   1.1     skrll 			 need to write out the plt entry here.  */
   3879   1.1     skrll 		      if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3880   1.1     skrll 			off &= ~1;
   3881   1.1     skrll 		      else
   3882   1.1     skrll 			{
   3883   1.1     skrll 			  hh->eh.plt.offset |= 1;
   3884   1.1     skrll 			  do_plt = 1;
   3885   1.1     skrll 			}
   3886   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3887   1.1     skrll 		}
   3888   1.1     skrll 	      else
   3889   1.1     skrll 		{
   3890   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma *local_plt_offsets;
   3891   1.1     skrll 
   3892   1.1     skrll 		  if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   3893   1.1     skrll 		    abort ();
   3894   1.1     skrll 
   3895   1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_offsets = local_got_offsets + symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   3896   1.1     skrll 		  off = local_plt_offsets[r_symndx];
   3897   1.1     skrll 
   3898   1.1     skrll 		  /* As for the local .got entry case, we use the last
   3899   1.1     skrll 		     bit to record whether we've already initialised
   3900   1.1     skrll 		     this local .plt entry.  */
   3901   1.1     skrll 		  if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3902   1.1     skrll 		    off &= ~1;
   3903   1.1     skrll 		  else
   3904   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3905   1.1     skrll 		      local_plt_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   3906   1.1     skrll 		      do_plt = 1;
   3907   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3908   1.1     skrll 		}
   3909   1.1     skrll 
   3910   1.1     skrll 	      if (do_plt)
   3911   1.1     skrll 		{
   3912   1.7  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   3913   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3914   1.1     skrll 		      /* Output a dynamic IPLT relocation for this
   3915   1.1     skrll 			 PLT entry.  */
   3916   1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3917   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_byte *loc;
   3918   1.1     skrll 		      asection *s = htab->srelplt;
   3919   1.1     skrll 
   3920   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_offset = (off
   3921   1.1     skrll 					 + htab->splt->output_offset
   3922   1.1     skrll 					 + htab->splt->output_section->vma);
   3923   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   3924   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend = relocation;
   3925   1.1     skrll 		      loc = s->contents;
   3926   1.1     skrll 		      loc += s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3927   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3928   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3929   1.1     skrll 		  else
   3930   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3931   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3932   1.1     skrll 				  relocation,
   3933   1.1     skrll 				  htab->splt->contents + off);
   3934   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3935   1.1     skrll 				  elf_gp (htab->splt->output_section->owner),
   3936   1.1     skrll 				  htab->splt->contents + off + 4);
   3937   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3938   1.1     skrll 		}
   3939   1.1     skrll 
   3940   1.1     skrll 	      if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   3941   1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   3942   1.1     skrll 
   3943   1.1     skrll 	      /* PLABELs contain function pointers.  Relocation is to
   3944   1.1     skrll 		 the entry for the function in the .plt.  The magic +2
   3945   1.1     skrll 		 offset signals to $$dyncall that the function pointer
   3946   1.1     skrll 		 is in the .plt and thus has a gp pointer too.
   3947   1.1     skrll 		 Exception:  Undefined PLABELs should have a value of
   3948   1.1     skrll 		 zero.  */
   3949   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh == NULL
   3950   1.1     skrll 		  || (hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   3951   1.1     skrll 		      && hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefined))
   3952   1.1     skrll 		{
   3953   1.1     skrll 		  relocation = (off
   3954   1.1     skrll 				+ htab->splt->output_offset
   3955   1.1     skrll 				+ htab->splt->output_section->vma
   3956   1.1     skrll 				+ 2);
   3957   1.1     skrll 		}
   3958   1.1     skrll 	      plabel = 1;
   3959   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3960   1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through and possibly emit a dynamic relocation.  */
   3961   1.1     skrll 
   3962   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3963   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3964   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14F:
   3965   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   3966   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
   3967   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3968   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3969   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3970   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR32:
   3971   1.1     skrll 	  if ((input_section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0)
   3972   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3973   1.1     skrll 
   3974   1.1     skrll 	  /* The reloc types handled here and this conditional
   3975   1.1     skrll 	     expression must match the code in ..check_relocs and
   3976   1.1     skrll 	     allocate_dynrelocs.  ie. We need exactly the same condition
   3977   1.1     skrll 	     as in ..check_relocs, with some extra conditions (dynindx
   3978   1.1     skrll 	     test in this case) to cater for relocs removed by
   3979   1.1     skrll 	     allocate_dynrelocs.  If you squint, the non-shared test
   3980   1.1     skrll 	     here does indeed match the one in ..check_relocs, the
   3981   1.1     skrll 	     difference being that here we test DEF_DYNAMIC as well as
   3982   1.1     skrll 	     !DEF_REGULAR.  All common syms end up with !DEF_REGULAR,
   3983   1.1     skrll 	     which is why we can't use just that test here.
   3984   1.1     skrll 	     Conversely, DEF_DYNAMIC can't be used in check_relocs as
   3985   1.1     skrll 	     there all files have not been loaded.  */
   3986   1.7  christos 	  if ((bfd_link_pic (info)
   3987   1.1     skrll 	       && (hh == NULL
   3988   1.1     skrll 		   || ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other) == STV_DEFAULT
   3989   1.1     skrll 		   || hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3990   1.1     skrll 	       && (IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)
   3991   1.1     skrll 		   || !SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, &hh->eh)))
   3992   1.7  christos 	      || (!bfd_link_pic (info)
   3993   1.1     skrll 		  && hh != NULL
   3994   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   3995   1.1     skrll 		  && !hh->eh.non_got_ref
   3996   1.1     skrll 		  && ((ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   3997   1.1     skrll 		       && hh->eh.def_dynamic
   3998   1.1     skrll 		       && !hh->eh.def_regular)
   3999   1.1     skrll 		      || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   4000   1.1     skrll 		      || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)))
   4001   1.1     skrll 	    {
   4002   1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   4003   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_boolean skip;
   4004   1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   4005   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   4006   1.1     skrll 
   4007   1.1     skrll 	      /* When generating a shared object, these relocations
   4008   1.1     skrll 		 are copied into the output file to be resolved at run
   4009   1.1     skrll 		 time.  */
   4010   1.1     skrll 
   4011   1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_addend = rela->r_addend;
   4012   1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset =
   4013   1.1     skrll 		_bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section,
   4014   1.1     skrll 					 rela->r_offset);
   4015   1.1     skrll 	      skip = (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   4016   1.1     skrll 		      || outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2);
   4017   1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_offset
   4018   1.1     skrll 				  + input_section->output_section->vma);
   4019   1.7  christos 
   4020   1.1     skrll 	      if (skip)
   4021   1.1     skrll 		{
   4022   1.1     skrll 		  memset (&outrel, 0, sizeof (outrel));
   4023   1.1     skrll 		}
   4024   1.1     skrll 	      else if (hh != NULL
   4025   1.1     skrll 		       && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   4026   1.1     skrll 		       && (plabel
   4027   1.1     skrll 			   || !IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)
   4028   1.7  christos 			   || !bfd_link_pic (info)
   4029   1.7  christos 			   || !SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, &hh->eh)
   4030   1.1     skrll 			   || !hh->eh.def_regular))
   4031   1.1     skrll 		{
   4032   1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (hh->eh.dynindx, r_type);
   4033   1.1     skrll 		}
   4034   1.1     skrll 	      else /* It's a local symbol, or one marked to become local.  */
   4035   1.1     skrll 		{
   4036   1.1     skrll 		  int indx = 0;
   4037   1.1     skrll 
   4038   1.1     skrll 		  /* Add the absolute offset of the symbol.  */
   4039   1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_addend += relocation;
   4040   1.1     skrll 
   4041   1.1     skrll 		  /* Global plabels need to be processed by the
   4042   1.1     skrll 		     dynamic linker so that functions have at most one
   4043   1.1     skrll 		     fptr.  For this reason, we need to differentiate
   4044   1.1     skrll 		     between global and local plabels, which we do by
   4045   1.1     skrll 		     providing the function symbol for a global plabel
   4046   1.1     skrll 		     reloc, and no symbol for local plabels.  */
   4047   1.1     skrll 		  if (! plabel
   4048   1.1     skrll 		      && sym_sec != NULL
   4049   1.1     skrll 		      && sym_sec->output_section != NULL
   4050   1.1     skrll 		      && ! bfd_is_abs_section (sym_sec))
   4051   1.1     skrll 		    {
   4052   1.1     skrll 		      asection *osec;
   4053   1.1     skrll 
   4054   1.1     skrll 		      osec = sym_sec->output_section;
   4055   1.1     skrll 		      indx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   4056   1.1     skrll 		      if (indx == 0)
   4057   1.1     skrll 			{
   4058   1.1     skrll 			  osec = htab->etab.text_index_section;
   4059   1.1     skrll 			  indx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   4060   1.1     skrll 			}
   4061   1.1     skrll 		      BFD_ASSERT (indx != 0);
   4062   1.1     skrll 
   4063   1.1     skrll 		      /* We are turning this relocation into one
   4064   1.1     skrll 			 against a section symbol, so subtract out the
   4065   1.1     skrll 			 output section's address but not the offset
   4066   1.1     skrll 			 of the input section in the output section.  */
   4067   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend -= osec->vma;
   4068   1.1     skrll 		    }
   4069   1.1     skrll 
   4070   1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, r_type);
   4071   1.1     skrll 		}
   4072   1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   4073   1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   4074   1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   4075   1.1     skrll 
   4076   1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   4077   1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4078   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4079   1.1     skrll 	    }
   4080   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4081   1.7  christos 
   4082   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   4083   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   4084   1.1     skrll 	  {
   4085   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   4086   1.7  christos 
   4087   1.1     skrll 	    off = htab->tls_ldm_got.offset;
   4088   1.1     skrll 	    if (off & 1)
   4089   1.1     skrll 	      off &= ~1;
   4090   1.1     skrll 	    else
   4091   1.1     skrll 	      {
   4092   1.1     skrll 		Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   4093   1.1     skrll 		bfd_byte *loc;
   4094   1.1     skrll 
   4095   1.7  christos 		outrel.r_offset = (off
   4096   1.1     skrll 				   + htab->sgot->output_section->vma
   4097   1.1     skrll 				   + htab->sgot->output_offset);
   4098   1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = 0;
   4099   1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32);
   4100   1.7  christos 		loc = htab->srelgot->contents;
   4101   1.1     skrll 		loc += htab->srelgot->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4102   1.1     skrll 
   4103   1.1     skrll 		bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4104   1.1     skrll 		htab->tls_ldm_got.offset |= 1;
   4105   1.1     skrll 	      }
   4106   1.1     skrll 
   4107   1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   4108   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   4109   1.1     skrll 			  + htab->sgot->output_offset
   4110   1.1     skrll 			  + htab->sgot->output_section->vma);
   4111   1.1     skrll 
   4112   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   4113   1.1     skrll 	  }
   4114   1.1     skrll 
   4115   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L:
   4116   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO14R:
   4117   1.1     skrll 	  relocation -= dtpoff_base (info);
   4118   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4119   1.1     skrll 
   4120   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   4121   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   4122   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   4123   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   4124   1.1     skrll 	  {
   4125   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   4126   1.1     skrll 	    int indx;
   4127   1.1     skrll 	    char tls_type;
   4128   1.1     skrll 
   4129   1.1     skrll 	    indx = 0;
   4130   1.1     skrll 	    if (hh != NULL)
   4131   1.1     skrll 	      {
   4132   1.1     skrll 	        bfd_boolean dyn;
   4133   1.1     skrll 	        dyn = htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created;
   4134   1.1     skrll 
   4135   1.7  christos 		if (WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn,
   4136   1.7  christos 						     bfd_link_pic (info),
   4137   1.7  christos 						     &hh->eh)
   4138   1.7  christos 		    && (!bfd_link_pic (info)
   4139   1.1     skrll 			|| !SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, &hh->eh)))
   4140   1.1     skrll 		  {
   4141   1.1     skrll 		    indx = hh->eh.dynindx;
   4142   1.1     skrll 		  }
   4143   1.1     skrll 		off = hh->eh.got.offset;
   4144   1.1     skrll 		tls_type = hh->tls_type;
   4145   1.1     skrll 	      }
   4146   1.1     skrll 	    else
   4147   1.1     skrll 	      {
   4148   1.1     skrll 		off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   4149   1.1     skrll 		tls_type = hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd)[r_symndx];
   4150   1.1     skrll 	      }
   4151   1.1     skrll 
   4152   1.1     skrll 	    if (tls_type == GOT_UNKNOWN)
   4153   1.1     skrll 	      abort ();
   4154   1.1     skrll 
   4155   1.1     skrll 	    if ((off & 1) != 0)
   4156   1.1     skrll 	      off &= ~1;
   4157   1.1     skrll 	    else
   4158   1.1     skrll 	      {
   4159   1.1     skrll 		bfd_boolean need_relocs = FALSE;
   4160   1.1     skrll 		Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   4161   1.1     skrll 		bfd_byte *loc = NULL;
   4162   1.1     skrll 		int cur_off = off;
   4163   1.1     skrll 
   4164   1.1     skrll 	        /* The GOT entries have not been initialized yet.  Do it
   4165   1.1     skrll 	           now, and emit any relocations.  If both an IE GOT and a
   4166   1.1     skrll 	           GD GOT are necessary, we emit the GD first.  */
   4167   1.1     skrll 
   4168   1.7  christos 		if ((bfd_link_pic (info) || indx != 0)
   4169   1.1     skrll 		    && (hh == NULL
   4170   1.1     skrll 			|| ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other) == STV_DEFAULT
   4171   1.1     skrll 			|| hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak))
   4172   1.1     skrll 		  {
   4173   1.1     skrll 		    need_relocs = TRUE;
   4174   1.7  christos 		    loc = htab->srelgot->contents;
   4175   1.1     skrll 		    /* FIXME (CAO): Should this be reloc_count++ ? */
   4176   1.1     skrll 		    loc += htab->srelgot->reloc_count * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4177   1.1     skrll 		  }
   4178   1.1     skrll 
   4179   1.1     skrll 		if (tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD)
   4180   1.1     skrll 		  {
   4181   1.1     skrll 		    if (need_relocs)
   4182   1.1     skrll 		      {
   4183   1.1     skrll 			outrel.r_offset = (cur_off
   4184   1.1     skrll 					   + htab->sgot->output_section->vma
   4185   1.1     skrll 					   + htab->sgot->output_offset);
   4186   1.1     skrll 			outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx,R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32);
   4187   1.1     skrll 			outrel.r_addend = 0;
   4188   1.1     skrll 			bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0, htab->sgot->contents + cur_off);
   4189   1.1     skrll 			bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4190   1.1     skrll 			htab->srelgot->reloc_count++;
   4191   1.1     skrll 			loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4192   1.1     skrll 
   4193   1.1     skrll 			if (indx == 0)
   4194   1.1     skrll 			  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relocation - dtpoff_base (info),
   4195   1.1     skrll 				      htab->sgot->contents + cur_off + 4);
   4196   1.1     skrll 			else
   4197   1.1     skrll 			  {
   4198   1.1     skrll 			    bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0,
   4199   1.1     skrll 					htab->sgot->contents + cur_off + 4);
   4200   1.1     skrll 			    outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32);
   4201   1.1     skrll 			    outrel.r_offset += 4;
   4202   1.1     skrll 			    bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel,loc);
   4203   1.1     skrll 			    htab->srelgot->reloc_count++;
   4204   1.1     skrll 			    loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4205   1.1     skrll 			  }
   4206   1.1     skrll 		      }
   4207   1.1     skrll 		    else
   4208   1.1     skrll 		      {
   4209   1.1     skrll 		        /* If we are not emitting relocations for a
   4210   1.1     skrll 		           general dynamic reference, then we must be in a
   4211   1.1     skrll 		           static link or an executable link with the
   4212   1.1     skrll 		           symbol binding locally.  Mark it as belonging
   4213   1.1     skrll 		           to module 1, the executable.  */
   4214   1.1     skrll 		        bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 1,
   4215   1.1     skrll 				    htab->sgot->contents + cur_off);
   4216   1.1     skrll 		        bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relocation - dtpoff_base (info),
   4217   1.1     skrll 				    htab->sgot->contents + cur_off + 4);
   4218   1.1     skrll 		      }
   4219   1.1     skrll 
   4220   1.1     skrll 
   4221   1.1     skrll 		    cur_off += 8;
   4222   1.1     skrll 		  }
   4223   1.1     skrll 
   4224   1.1     skrll 		if (tls_type & GOT_TLS_IE)
   4225   1.1     skrll 		  {
   4226   1.1     skrll 		    if (need_relocs)
   4227   1.1     skrll 		      {
   4228   1.1     skrll 			outrel.r_offset = (cur_off
   4229   1.1     skrll 					   + htab->sgot->output_section->vma
   4230   1.1     skrll 					   + htab->sgot->output_offset);
   4231   1.1     skrll 			outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32);
   4232   1.1     skrll 
   4233   1.1     skrll 			if (indx == 0)
   4234   1.1     skrll 			  outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info);
   4235   1.1     skrll 			else
   4236   1.1     skrll 			  outrel.r_addend = 0;
   4237   1.1     skrll 
   4238   1.1     skrll 			bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4239   1.1     skrll 			htab->srelgot->reloc_count++;
   4240   1.1     skrll 			loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4241   1.1     skrll 		      }
   4242   1.1     skrll 		    else
   4243   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, tpoff (info, relocation),
   4244   1.1     skrll 				  htab->sgot->contents + cur_off);
   4245   1.1     skrll 
   4246   1.1     skrll 		    cur_off += 4;
   4247   1.1     skrll 		  }
   4248   1.1     skrll 
   4249   1.1     skrll 		if (hh != NULL)
   4250   1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.got.offset |= 1;
   4251   1.1     skrll 		else
   4252   1.1     skrll 		  local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   4253   1.1     skrll 	      }
   4254   1.1     skrll 
   4255   1.1     skrll 	    if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD)
   4256   1.1     skrll 	  	&& r_type != R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L
   4257   1.1     skrll 	  	&& r_type != R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R)
   4258   1.1     skrll 	      off += 2 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   4259   1.1     skrll 
   4260   1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   4261   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   4262   1.1     skrll 			  + htab->sgot->output_offset
   4263   1.1     skrll 			  + htab->sgot->output_section->vma);
   4264   1.1     skrll 
   4265   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   4266   1.1     skrll 	  }
   4267   1.1     skrll 
   4268   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L:
   4269   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LE14R:
   4270   1.1     skrll 	  {
   4271   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = tpoff (info, relocation);
   4272   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   4273   1.1     skrll 	  }
   4274   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4275   1.1     skrll 
   4276   1.1     skrll 	default:
   4277   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4278   1.1     skrll 	}
   4279   1.1     skrll 
   4280   1.1     skrll       rstatus = final_link_relocate (input_section, contents, rela, relocation,
   4281   1.1     skrll 			       htab, sym_sec, hh, info);
   4282   1.1     skrll 
   4283   1.1     skrll       if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_ok)
   4284   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   4285   1.1     skrll 
   4286   1.1     skrll       if (hh != NULL)
   4287   1.1     skrll 	sym_name = hh_name (hh);
   4288   1.1     skrll       else
   4289   1.1     skrll 	{
   4290   1.1     skrll 	  sym_name = bfd_elf_string_from_elf_section (input_bfd,
   4291   1.1     skrll 						      symtab_hdr->sh_link,
   4292   1.1     skrll 						      sym->st_name);
   4293   1.1     skrll 	  if (sym_name == NULL)
   4294   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   4295   1.1     skrll 	  if (*sym_name == '\0')
   4296   1.1     skrll 	    sym_name = bfd_section_name (input_bfd, sym_sec);
   4297   1.1     skrll 	}
   4298   1.1     skrll 
   4299   1.1     skrll       howto = elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type;
   4300   1.1     skrll 
   4301   1.1     skrll       if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_undefined || rstatus == bfd_reloc_notsupported)
   4302   1.1     skrll 	{
   4303   1.1     skrll 	  if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_notsupported || !warned_undef)
   4304   1.1     skrll 	    {
   4305   1.1     skrll 	      (*_bfd_error_handler)
   4306   1.1     skrll 		(_("%B(%A+0x%lx): cannot handle %s for %s"),
   4307   1.1     skrll 		 input_bfd,
   4308   1.1     skrll 		 input_section,
   4309   1.1     skrll 		 (long) rela->r_offset,
   4310   1.1     skrll 		 howto->name,
   4311   1.1     skrll 		 sym_name);
   4312   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   4313   1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   4314   1.1     skrll 	    }
   4315   1.1     skrll 	}
   4316   1.1     skrll       else
   4317  1.10  christos 	(*info->callbacks->reloc_overflow)
   4318  1.10  christos 	  (info, (hh ? &hh->eh.root : NULL), sym_name, howto->name,
   4319  1.10  christos 	   (bfd_vma) 0, input_bfd, input_section, rela->r_offset);
   4320   1.1     skrll     }
   4321   1.1     skrll 
   4322   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   4323   1.1     skrll }
   4324   1.1     skrll 
   4325   1.1     skrll /* Finish up dynamic symbol handling.  We set the contents of various
   4326   1.1     skrll    dynamic sections here.  */
   4327   1.1     skrll 
   4328   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   4329   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_symbol (bfd *output_bfd,
   4330   1.1     skrll 				  struct bfd_link_info *info,
   4331   1.1     skrll 				  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   4332   1.1     skrll 				  Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   4333   1.1     skrll {
   4334   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   4335   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   4336   1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *loc;
   4337   1.1     skrll 
   4338   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   4339   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   4340   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   4341   1.1     skrll 
   4342   1.1     skrll   if (eh->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   4343   1.1     skrll     {
   4344   1.1     skrll       bfd_vma value;
   4345   1.1     skrll 
   4346   1.1     skrll       if (eh->plt.offset & 1)
   4347   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4348   1.1     skrll 
   4349   1.1     skrll       /* This symbol has an entry in the procedure linkage table.  Set
   4350   1.1     skrll 	 it up.
   4351   1.1     skrll 
   4352   1.1     skrll 	 The format of a plt entry is
   4353   1.1     skrll 	 <funcaddr>
   4354   1.1     skrll 	 <__gp>
   4355   1.1     skrll       */
   4356   1.1     skrll       value = 0;
   4357   1.1     skrll       if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   4358   1.1     skrll 	  || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   4359   1.1     skrll 	{
   4360   1.1     skrll 	  value = eh->root.u.def.value;
   4361   1.1     skrll 	  if (eh->root.u.def.section->output_section != NULL)
   4362   1.1     skrll 	    value += (eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4363   1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4364   1.1     skrll 	}
   4365   1.1     skrll 
   4366   1.1     skrll       /* Create a dynamic IPLT relocation for this entry.  */
   4367   1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = (eh->plt.offset
   4368   1.1     skrll 		      + htab->splt->output_offset
   4369   1.1     skrll 		      + htab->splt->output_section->vma);
   4370   1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx != -1)
   4371   1.1     skrll 	{
   4372   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   4373   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = 0;
   4374   1.1     skrll 	}
   4375   1.1     skrll       else
   4376   1.1     skrll 	{
   4377   1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol has been marked to become local, and is
   4378   1.1     skrll 	     used by a plabel so must be kept in the .plt.  */
   4379   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   4380   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = value;
   4381   1.1     skrll 	}
   4382   1.1     skrll 
   4383   1.1     skrll       loc = htab->srelplt->contents;
   4384   1.1     skrll       loc += htab->srelplt->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4385   1.1     skrll       bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (htab->splt->output_section->owner, &rela, loc);
   4386   1.1     skrll 
   4387   1.1     skrll       if (!eh->def_regular)
   4388   1.1     skrll 	{
   4389   1.1     skrll 	  /* Mark the symbol as undefined, rather than as defined in
   4390   1.1     skrll 	     the .plt section.  Leave the value alone.  */
   4391   1.1     skrll 	  sym->st_shndx = SHN_UNDEF;
   4392   1.1     skrll 	}
   4393   1.1     skrll     }
   4394   1.1     skrll 
   4395   1.1     skrll   if (eh->got.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   4396   1.1     skrll       && (hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) == 0
   4397   1.1     skrll       && (hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->tls_type & GOT_TLS_IE) == 0)
   4398   1.1     skrll     {
   4399   1.1     skrll       /* This symbol has an entry in the global offset table.  Set it
   4400   1.1     skrll 	 up.  */
   4401   1.1     skrll 
   4402   1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = ((eh->got.offset &~ (bfd_vma) 1)
   4403   1.1     skrll 		      + htab->sgot->output_offset
   4404   1.1     skrll 		      + htab->sgot->output_section->vma);
   4405   1.1     skrll 
   4406   1.1     skrll       /* If this is a -Bsymbolic link and the symbol is defined
   4407   1.1     skrll 	 locally or was forced to be local because of a version file,
   4408   1.1     skrll 	 we just want to emit a RELATIVE reloc.  The entry in the
   4409   1.1     skrll 	 global offset table will already have been initialized in the
   4410   1.1     skrll 	 relocate_section function.  */
   4411   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_pic (info)
   4412   1.7  christos 	  && (SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, eh) || eh->dynindx == -1)
   4413   1.1     skrll 	  && eh->def_regular)
   4414   1.1     skrll 	{
   4415   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   4416   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = (eh->root.u.def.value
   4417   1.1     skrll 			  + eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4418   1.1     skrll 			  + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4419   1.1     skrll 	}
   4420   1.1     skrll       else
   4421   1.1     skrll 	{
   4422   1.1     skrll 	  if ((eh->got.offset & 1) != 0)
   4423   1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   4424   1.1     skrll 
   4425   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0, htab->sgot->contents + (eh->got.offset & ~1));
   4426   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   4427   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = 0;
   4428   1.1     skrll 	}
   4429   1.1     skrll 
   4430   1.1     skrll       loc = htab->srelgot->contents;
   4431   1.1     skrll       loc += htab->srelgot->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4432   1.1     skrll       bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   4433   1.1     skrll     }
   4434   1.1     skrll 
   4435   1.1     skrll   if (eh->needs_copy)
   4436   1.1     skrll     {
   4437   1.1     skrll       asection *sec;
   4438   1.1     skrll 
   4439   1.1     skrll       /* This symbol needs a copy reloc.  Set it up.  */
   4440   1.1     skrll 
   4441   1.1     skrll       if (! (eh->dynindx != -1
   4442   1.1     skrll 	     && (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   4443   1.1     skrll 		 || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)))
   4444   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4445   1.1     skrll 
   4446   1.1     skrll       sec = htab->srelbss;
   4447   1.1     skrll 
   4448   1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = (eh->root.u.def.value
   4449   1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4450   1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4451   1.1     skrll       rela.r_addend = 0;
   4452   1.1     skrll       rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_COPY);
   4453   1.1     skrll       loc = sec->contents + sec->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4454   1.1     skrll       bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   4455   1.1     skrll     }
   4456   1.1     skrll 
   4457   1.1     skrll   /* Mark _DYNAMIC and _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ as absolute.  */
   4458   1.7  christos   if (eh == htab->etab.hdynamic || eh == htab->etab.hgot)
   4459   1.1     skrll     {
   4460   1.1     skrll       sym->st_shndx = SHN_ABS;
   4461   1.1     skrll     }
   4462   1.1     skrll 
   4463   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   4464   1.1     skrll }
   4465   1.1     skrll 
   4466   1.1     skrll /* Used to decide how to sort relocs in an optimal manner for the
   4467   1.1     skrll    dynamic linker, before writing them out.  */
   4468   1.1     skrll 
   4469   1.1     skrll static enum elf_reloc_type_class
   4470   1.7  christos elf32_hppa_reloc_type_class (const struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   4471   1.7  christos 			     const asection *rel_sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   4472   1.7  christos 			     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
   4473   1.1     skrll {
   4474   1.1     skrll   /* Handle TLS relocs first; we don't want them to be marked
   4475   1.3  christos      relative by the "if (ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) == STN_UNDEF)"
   4476   1.1     skrll      check below.  */
   4477   1.1     skrll   switch ((int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   4478   1.1     skrll     {
   4479   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32:
   4480   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32:
   4481   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32:
   4482   1.1     skrll         return reloc_class_normal;
   4483   1.1     skrll     }
   4484   1.1     skrll 
   4485   1.3  christos   if (ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) == STN_UNDEF)
   4486   1.1     skrll     return reloc_class_relative;
   4487   1.1     skrll 
   4488   1.1     skrll   switch ((int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   4489   1.1     skrll     {
   4490   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_IPLT:
   4491   1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_plt;
   4492   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_COPY:
   4493   1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_copy;
   4494   1.1     skrll     default:
   4495   1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_normal;
   4496   1.1     skrll     }
   4497   1.1     skrll }
   4498   1.1     skrll 
   4499   1.1     skrll /* Finish up the dynamic sections.  */
   4500   1.1     skrll 
   4501   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   4502   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd,
   4503   1.1     skrll 				    struct bfd_link_info *info)
   4504   1.1     skrll {
   4505   1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   4506   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   4507   1.1     skrll   asection *sdyn;
   4508   1.6  christos   asection * sgot;
   4509   1.1     skrll 
   4510   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   4511   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   4512   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   4513   1.3  christos 
   4514   1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->etab.dynobj;
   4515   1.1     skrll 
   4516   1.6  christos   sgot = htab->sgot;
   4517   1.6  christos   /* A broken linker script might have discarded the dynamic sections.
   4518   1.6  christos      Catch this here so that we do not seg-fault later on.  */
   4519   1.6  christos   if (sgot != NULL && bfd_is_abs_section (sgot->output_section))
   4520   1.6  christos     return FALSE;
   4521   1.6  christos 
   4522   1.6  christos   sdyn = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".dynamic");
   4523   1.1     skrll 
   4524   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   4525   1.1     skrll     {
   4526   1.1     skrll       Elf32_External_Dyn *dyncon, *dynconend;
   4527   1.1     skrll 
   4528   1.1     skrll       if (sdyn == NULL)
   4529   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4530   1.1     skrll 
   4531   1.1     skrll       dyncon = (Elf32_External_Dyn *) sdyn->contents;
   4532   1.1     skrll       dynconend = (Elf32_External_Dyn *) (sdyn->contents + sdyn->size);
   4533   1.1     skrll       for (; dyncon < dynconend; dyncon++)
   4534   1.1     skrll 	{
   4535   1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Dyn dyn;
   4536   1.1     skrll 	  asection *s;
   4537   1.1     skrll 
   4538   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf32_swap_dyn_in (dynobj, dyncon, &dyn);
   4539   1.1     skrll 
   4540   1.1     skrll 	  switch (dyn.d_tag)
   4541   1.1     skrll 	    {
   4542   1.1     skrll 	    default:
   4543   1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   4544   1.1     skrll 
   4545   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTGOT:
   4546   1.1     skrll 	      /* Use PLTGOT to set the GOT register.  */
   4547   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = elf_gp (output_bfd);
   4548   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4549   1.1     skrll 
   4550   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_JMPREL:
   4551   1.1     skrll 	      s = htab->srelplt;
   4552   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset;
   4553   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4554   1.1     skrll 
   4555   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTRELSZ:
   4556   1.1     skrll 	      s = htab->srelplt;
   4557   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_val = s->size;
   4558   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4559   1.1     skrll 
   4560   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_RELASZ:
   4561   1.1     skrll 	      /* Don't count procedure linkage table relocs in the
   4562   1.1     skrll 		 overall reloc count.  */
   4563   1.1     skrll 	      s = htab->srelplt;
   4564   1.1     skrll 	      if (s == NULL)
   4565   1.1     skrll 		continue;
   4566   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_val -= s->size;
   4567   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4568   1.1     skrll 
   4569   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_RELA:
   4570   1.1     skrll 	      /* We may not be using the standard ELF linker script.
   4571   1.1     skrll 		 If .rela.plt is the first .rela section, we adjust
   4572   1.1     skrll 		 DT_RELA to not include it.  */
   4573   1.1     skrll 	      s = htab->srelplt;
   4574   1.1     skrll 	      if (s == NULL)
   4575   1.1     skrll 		continue;
   4576   1.1     skrll 	      if (dyn.d_un.d_ptr != s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset)
   4577   1.1     skrll 		continue;
   4578   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr += s->size;
   4579   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4580   1.1     skrll 	    }
   4581   1.1     skrll 
   4582   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf32_swap_dyn_out (output_bfd, &dyn, dyncon);
   4583   1.1     skrll 	}
   4584   1.1     skrll     }
   4585   1.1     skrll 
   4586   1.6  christos   if (sgot != NULL && sgot->size != 0)
   4587   1.1     skrll     {
   4588   1.1     skrll       /* Fill in the first entry in the global offset table.
   4589   1.1     skrll 	 We use it to point to our dynamic section, if we have one.  */
   4590   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   4591   1.1     skrll 		  sdyn ? sdyn->output_section->vma + sdyn->output_offset : 0,
   4592   1.6  christos 		  sgot->contents);
   4593   1.1     skrll 
   4594   1.1     skrll       /* The second entry is reserved for use by the dynamic linker.  */
   4595   1.6  christos       memset (sgot->contents + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE, 0, GOT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   4596   1.1     skrll 
   4597   1.1     skrll       /* Set .got entry size.  */
   4598   1.6  christos       elf_section_data (sgot->output_section)
   4599   1.1     skrll 	->this_hdr.sh_entsize = GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   4600   1.1     skrll     }
   4601   1.1     skrll 
   4602   1.1     skrll   if (htab->splt != NULL && htab->splt->size != 0)
   4603   1.1     skrll     {
   4604   1.7  christos       /* Set plt entry size to 0 instead of PLT_ENTRY_SIZE, since we add the
   4605   1.7  christos 	 plt stubs and as such the section does not hold a table of fixed-size
   4606   1.7  christos 	 entries.  */
   4607   1.7  christos       elf_section_data (htab->splt->output_section)->this_hdr.sh_entsize = 0;
   4608   1.1     skrll 
   4609   1.1     skrll       if (htab->need_plt_stub)
   4610   1.1     skrll 	{
   4611   1.1     skrll 	  /* Set up the .plt stub.  */
   4612   1.1     skrll 	  memcpy (htab->splt->contents
   4613   1.1     skrll 		  + htab->splt->size - sizeof (plt_stub),
   4614   1.1     skrll 		  plt_stub, sizeof (plt_stub));
   4615   1.1     skrll 
   4616   1.1     skrll 	  if ((htab->splt->output_offset
   4617   1.1     skrll 	       + htab->splt->output_section->vma
   4618   1.1     skrll 	       + htab->splt->size)
   4619   1.6  christos 	      != (sgot->output_offset
   4620   1.6  christos 		  + sgot->output_section->vma))
   4621   1.1     skrll 	    {
   4622   1.1     skrll 	      (*_bfd_error_handler)
   4623   1.1     skrll 		(_(".got section not immediately after .plt section"));
   4624   1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   4625   1.1     skrll 	    }
   4626   1.1     skrll 	}
   4627   1.1     skrll     }
   4628   1.1     skrll 
   4629   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   4630   1.1     skrll }
   4631   1.1     skrll 
   4632   1.1     skrll /* Called when writing out an object file to decide the type of a
   4633   1.1     skrll    symbol.  */
   4634   1.1     skrll static int
   4635   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_elf_get_symbol_type (Elf_Internal_Sym *elf_sym, int type)
   4636   1.1     skrll {
   4637   1.1     skrll   if (ELF_ST_TYPE (elf_sym->st_info) == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   4638   1.1     skrll     return STT_PARISC_MILLI;
   4639   1.1     skrll   else
   4640   1.1     skrll     return type;
   4641   1.1     skrll }
   4642   1.1     skrll 
   4643   1.1     skrll /* Misc BFD support code.  */
   4644   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_is_local_label_name    elf_hppa_is_local_label_name
   4645   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_reloc_type_lookup	     elf_hppa_reloc_type_lookup
   4646   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_reloc_name_lookup      elf_hppa_reloc_name_lookup
   4647   1.1     skrll #define elf_info_to_howto		     elf_hppa_info_to_howto
   4648   1.1     skrll #define elf_info_to_howto_rel		     elf_hppa_info_to_howto_rel
   4649   1.1     skrll 
   4650   1.1     skrll /* Stuff for the BFD linker.  */
   4651   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_final_link	     elf32_hppa_final_link
   4652   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_link_hash_table_create elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_create
   4653   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_adjust_dynamic_symbol    elf32_hppa_adjust_dynamic_symbol
   4654   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_copy_indirect_symbol     elf32_hppa_copy_indirect_symbol
   4655   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_check_relocs	     elf32_hppa_check_relocs
   4656   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_create_dynamic_sections  elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections
   4657   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_fake_sections	     elf_hppa_fake_sections
   4658   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_relocate_section	     elf32_hppa_relocate_section
   4659   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_hide_symbol		     elf32_hppa_hide_symbol
   4660   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_symbol    elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_symbol
   4661   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_sections  elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections
   4662   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_size_dynamic_sections    elf32_hppa_size_dynamic_sections
   4663   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_init_index_section	     _bfd_elf_init_1_index_section
   4664   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_gc_mark_hook	     elf32_hppa_gc_mark_hook
   4665   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_gc_sweep_hook	     elf32_hppa_gc_sweep_hook
   4666   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_grok_prstatus	     elf32_hppa_grok_prstatus
   4667   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_grok_psinfo		     elf32_hppa_grok_psinfo
   4668   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_object_p		     elf32_hppa_object_p
   4669   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_final_write_processing   elf_hppa_final_write_processing
   4670   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_get_symbol_type	     elf32_hppa_elf_get_symbol_type
   4671   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_reloc_type_class	     elf32_hppa_reloc_type_class
   4672   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_action_discarded	     elf_hppa_action_discarded
   4673   1.1     skrll 
   4674   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_gc_sections	     1
   4675   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_refcount	     1
   4676   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_alignment	     2
   4677   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_got_plt	     0
   4678   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_readonly	     0
   4679   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_plt_sym	     0
   4680   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_got_header_size	     8
   4681   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_rela_normal		     1
   4682   1.1     skrll 
   4683   1.7  christos #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		hppa_elf32_vec
   4684   1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa"
   4685   1.1     skrll #define ELF_ARCH		bfd_arch_hppa
   4686   1.3  christos #define ELF_TARGET_ID		HPPA32_ELF_DATA
   4687   1.1     skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_CODE	EM_PARISC
   4688   1.1     skrll #define ELF_MAXPAGESIZE		0x1000
   4689   1.1     skrll #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_HPUX
   4690   1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_hpux_bed
   4691   1.1     skrll 
   4692   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4693   1.1     skrll 
   4694   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_SYM
   4695   1.7  christos #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		hppa_elf32_linux_vec
   4696   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_NAME
   4697   1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa-linux"
   4698   1.1     skrll #undef ELF_OSABI
   4699   1.6  christos #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_GNU
   4700   1.1     skrll #undef elf32_bed
   4701   1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_linux_bed
   4702   1.1     skrll 
   4703   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4704   1.1     skrll 
   4705   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_SYM
   4706   1.7  christos #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		hppa_elf32_nbsd_vec
   4707   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_NAME
   4708   1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa-netbsd"
   4709   1.1     skrll #undef ELF_OSABI
   4710   1.1     skrll #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_NETBSD
   4711   1.1     skrll #undef elf32_bed
   4712   1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_netbsd_bed
   4713   1.1     skrll 
   4714   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4715